Hyundai Azera 2017 Owner's Manual

O pe attiio n

M aiin na

S pe attiio nss

S M NU

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

F2

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

F3

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive HYUNDAI. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2017 HYUNDAI Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor Company.

F4

Introduction

H OW US E T S M AN L

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAU-

TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents.

Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight chapters plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's

Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety.

Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER,

WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words

DANGER, WARNING and

CAUTION.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

F5

Introduction

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

FU EL EQ UIIR EM NT

Gasoline engine

Unleaded

For Europe

For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating of

RON (Research Octane Number) 95 /

AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.

You may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI

87-90 but it may result in slight performance reduction of the vehicle. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)

Except Europe

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an Octane

Rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

87 or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the engine control system’s oxygen sensor and affect emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified (We recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

F6

Introduction

Leaded (if equipped)

For some countries, your vehicle is designed to use leaded gasoline.

When you are going to use leaded gasoline, we recommend that you ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Octane rating of leaded gasoline is same with unleaded one.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.

2. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

Other fuels

Using fuels such as;

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,

- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,

- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and

- Other metalic additives contained fuels, may cause vehicle and engine damage. Also, the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) may illuminate or cause plugging, misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc.

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

F7

Introduction

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl

Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock

Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or

Octane Rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).

For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000km (for

Europe)/ 15,000 km or 10,000 km

(except Europe). Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

F8

V EH LE RE K-

P RO ES

No special break-in period is needed.

By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first

2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

R ET RN G U D V EH LE

((F OR UR OP E))

HYUNDAI promotes an environmentally sound treatment for end of life vehicles and offers to take back your

HYUNDAI end of life vehicles in accordance with the European Union

(EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.

You can get detailed information from your national HYUNDAI homepage.

Introduction

F9

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

I

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2

Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3

Interior overview....................................................1-4

Instrument panel overview ...................................1-5

Engine compartment .............................................1-6


E XT RIIO R O VE

■ Front view

VIIE W ((II))

1-2

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood ..................................................3-50

2. Headlamp / DRL / Position lamp .......7-71

3. Turn signal lamp ................................7-71

4. Tires and wheels ...............................7-44

5. Outside rearview mirror .....................3-27

6. Panoramic sunroof* ...........................3-36

7. Front windshield wiper blades ...........7-38

8. Windows ............................................3-31

* : if equipped

OIG016001

E XT RIIO R O VE

■ Rear view

VIIE W ((IIII))


9. Doors ..................................................3-19

10. Fuel filler door...................................3-51

11. Rear combination lamp ....................7-73

12. Trunk .................................................3-41

13. High mounted stop lamp ..................7-74

14. Rear window defroster ...................3-119

15. Rear parking assist system*...........3-112

16. Antenna ..............................................4-3

17. Rearview camera* ..........................3-111

* : if equipped

OIG016002

1-3

1


IIN TE RIIO R O VE RV W

■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type C


1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-19

2. Driver position memory system ........3-21

3. Outside rearview mirror folding button ....................................3-29

4. Outside rearview mirror control switch ....................................3-28

5. Central door lock/unlock button ........3-17

6. Power window lock button ................3-34

7. Power window switches ....................3-31

8. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................3-56

9. Lane departure warning system* ......5-68

Lane keeping assist system button*..5-73

10 Blind spot detection system button*..................................5-48

11. Headlight leveling device* ............3-101

12. Fuel filler door opener button ..........3-51

13. Trunk release button ........................3-41

14. ESC OFF button..............................5-35

15. Hood release lever ..........................3-50

16. Light control/Turn signals ................3-94

17. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ..3-24

18. Steering wheel ................................3-23

19. Seat adjusting lever ..........................2-6

* : if equipped

OIG017003L

1-4

IIN ST RU ME T P NE L O VE VIIE

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B


1. Instrument cluster..............................3-55

2. Horn ..................................................3-25

3. Driver's front air bag ..........................2-45

4. Engine Start/Stop button/

Key ignition switch ........................5-6/5-9

5. Audio system / Navigation system ......4-5

6. Climate control system..........3-120/3-131

7. Clock................................................3-158

8. Hazard warning flasher switch ............6-2

9. Passenger’s front air bag ..................2-45

10. Driver’s knee air bag* ......................2-45

11. Glove box ......................................3-151

12. Shift lever ........................................5-14

13. Drive mode integrated control system ................................5-42

14. AUTO HOLD* ..................................5-29

15. EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)* ....5-24

16. Rear parking assist system OFF switch* ....................3-113

17. Parking assist system switch* ......3-115

18. Around view monitor (AVM)* ........3-118

19. Rear curtain button* ......................3-159

* : if equipped

1

OIG016004L

1-5


E NG E C MP TM EN

Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L GDI)

1-6

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29

2. Radiator cap ......................................7-30

3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-32

4. Air cleaner ........................................7-35

5. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-26

6. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-28

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir......7-34

8. Fuse box............................................7-56

9. Battery ..............................................7-40

OIG076001

Gasoline Engine (Lamda 3.0 GDI)



2. Radiator cap ......................................7-30


4. Air cleaner ........................................7-35




8. Fuse box............................................7-56

9. Battery ..............................................7-40

OIG076002

1-7

1


Gasoline Engine (Lamda 3.0/3.5 MPI)

1-8



2. Radiator cap ......................................7-30


4. Air cleaner ........................................7-35




8. Fuse box............................................7-56

9. Battery ..............................................7-40

OIG076004

Safety system of your vehicle

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.

It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

Important safety precautions .............................2-2

Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2

Restrain all children .........................................................2-2

Air bag hazards ................................................................2-2

Driver distraction .............................................................2-2

Control your speed ..........................................................2-3

Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4

Safety precautions ..........................................................2-5

Front seats..........................................................................2-6

Rear seats .........................................................................2-13

Headrest ...........................................................................2-15

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-19

Seat belts .............................................................2-23

Seat belt safety precautions ......................................2-23

Seat belt warning light .................................................2-24

Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-25

Additional seat belt safety precautions ...................2-30

Care of seat belts ..........................................................2-32

Child restraint system (CRS) .............................2-33

Our recommendation:Children always in the rear..2-33

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-34

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-36

Air bag - supplemental restraint system .........2-43

Where are the air bags? ..............................................2-45

How does the air bags system operate? .................2-49

What to expect after an air bag inflates ................2-52

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ...........2-54

SRS care ...........................................................................2-59

Additional safety precautions .....................................2-60

Air bag warning labels ..................................................2-61

2


IIM PO TA T S ET Y P EC AU TIIO S

You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children

All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate child restraint. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.

Air bag hazards

While air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones.

Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction and an accident:

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email while driving. Most countries have laws prohibiting drivers from texting.

Some countries and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.

2-2

• NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

2

2-3


S EA S

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

Driver’s seat

1. Forward and rearward

2. Seat cushion height

3. Seat cushion length adjustment*

4. Seatback angle adjustment

5. Lumbar support adjustment*

6. Headrest

7. Seat warmer*/Air ventilation seat*

Front passenger’s seat

8. Forward and rearward

9. Seat cushion height*

10. Seatback angle adjustment

11. Lumbar support adjustment*

12. Headrest

13. Seat warmer*/Air ventilation seat*

Rear seats

14. Seat warmer*

15. Armrest

16. Carrying long/narrow cargo

17. Headrest

* : if equipped

OIG036001L

2-4

Safety precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety together with the seat belts and air bags in an accident.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates. Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

• Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

• NEVER place anything or anyone between the air bag.

• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimize the risk of leg injuries.

2

2-5


Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate child restraint systems. Children who have outgrown a booster seat and adults must be restrained using the seat belts.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for more than one occupant.

• Always position the seatback upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.

• NEVER allow children or small infants to ride in a passenger’s lap.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.

• Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.

Front seats

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver’s foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.

(Continued)

2-6

(Continued)

• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position and proper locking of the seatback.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.

• Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.

• If there are occupants in the rear seats, be careful while adjusting the front seat position.

CAUTION

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.

• Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

Manual adjustment

OIG036058

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

2

2-7


OIG036059

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger’s hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger’s neck will strike the shoulder belt.

2-8

OIG036060

Seat cushion height (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat cushion:

• Push down the lever several times, to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up the lever several times, to raise the seat cushion.

OIG036006

Lumbar support

• The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch.

• Press the front portion of the switch (1) to increase support or the rear portion of the switch (2) to decrease support.

Power adjustment (if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING

NEVER allow children in the vehicle unattended. The power seats are operable when the engine is turned off.

The lumbar support does not operate up or down when the lumbar support is in the rearmost position.

In this case, to use the system, slightly increase support by pushing the front portion of the switch (1).

2

2-9


CAUTION

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the seats when the seat has been adjusted as far forward or rearward as possible.

• Do not adjust the seats longer than necessary when the engine is turned off. This may result in unnecessary battery drain.

• Do not operate two or more seats at the same time. This may result in an electrical malfunction.

OIG036002


To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OIG036004

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Push the control switch forward or rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seatback reaches the desired position.

2-10

Reclining seatback


(seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Driver and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.


When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.


OIG036003

Cushion length adjustment

(driver’s seat, if equipped)

• The cushion length can be adjusted by pressing the cushion length switch.

• Press the front portion of the switch to lengthen the cushion length or the rear portion of the switch to shorten the cushion length.

CAUTION

Do not allow your clothes or hands to get caught in the seat cushion.

2

2-11


OIG036005

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat cushion:

1. Push the front portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the front part of the seat cushion.

Push the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the height of the seat cushion.

2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OIG036066

Lumbar support

Type A (2 way)



OIG036007

Type B (4 way)



• To move the support position up or down, press switch (3) or (4).

The lumbar support does not operate up or down when the lumbar support is in the rearmost position.

In this case, to use the system, slightly increase support by pushing the front portion of the switch (1).

2-12

Seatback pocket Rear seats

Armrest

OIG036014

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front seatbacks.

OIG036017

The armrest is located in the center of the rear seat. Pull the armrest down (1) from the seatback to use it.

OIG036063

Cup holder

Type A

To use the center cup holder, pull down the armrest and then pull up the cover (1).

CAUTION

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.

2-13

2


Carrying long/narrow cargo

(if equipped)

OIG036018

Type B

To use the center cup holder, pull down the armrest and then push the outboard (2) of the cup holder to slide out.

OIG036068L

Storage compartment

To use the storage compartment, push the lever (1) and then pull up the cover. Close the cover after use.

OIG036020

Additional cargo space is provided to accommodate long/narrow cargo

(skis, poles, etc.) not able to fit properly in the trunk when closed.

1. Pull the armrest down.

2. Pull the cover down while pushing the release lever down.

2-14

CAUTION

• Be careful when loading cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.

• When cargo is loaded through the rear passenger seats, ensure the cargo is properly secured to prevent it from moving while driving.

WARNING

Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING

Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the automatic transmission is in P

(Park) and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo.

Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

Headrest

The vehicle’s front and rear seats have adjustable headrests. The headrests provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your headrests:

• Always properly adjust the headrests for all passengers

BEFORE starting the vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the headrest removed.

(Continued)

2

2-15


(Continued)

•

OLF034072N

Adjust the headrests so the middle of the headrests is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

• NEVER adjust the headrest position of the driver’s seat when the vehicle is in motion.

• Adjust the headrest as close to the passenger’s head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.

• Make sure the headrest locks into position after adjusting it.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the headrests.

Front seat headrests

CAUTION

When there is no occupant in the rear seats, adjust the height of the headrest to the lowest position. The rear seat headrest can reduce the visibility of the rear area.

ODH033105L

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats are equipped with adjustable headrests for the passengers safety and comfort.

2-16

OIG036008


The headrest may be adjusted forward to 3 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rearwards position, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it.

OIG036009

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support.

2. Lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

OLF034015

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

2

2-17


■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG036061

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button

(3) while pulling the headrest up

(4).

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to travel in a seat with the headrest removed.

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG036062

OIG036010

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with using the seatback angle lever or switch (1).

2-18

OIG036011

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Recline the seatback.

2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

4. Recline the seatback (4) with the seatback angle lever or switch (3).

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

Rear seat headrests

OIG036016

Adjusting the height up and down

(if equipped)

To raise the headrest:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

ODH034111

The rear seats are equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for the passenger’s safety and comfort.

To lower the headrest:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support.

2. Lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats

Front seat warmers (if equipped)

Seat warmers are provided to warm the seats during cold weather.

WARNING

The seat warmers can cause a

SERIOUS BURN, even at low temperatures and especially if used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the skin should use extreme caution, especially the following types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients.

• People with sensitive skin or who burn easily.

• Fatigued individuals.

• Intoxicated individuals.

(Continued)

2-19

2


(Continued)

• People taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness.

■ Type A

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the seat that insulates against heat when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat cushion. This may cause the seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat warmers and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers.

• Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer or air ventilation system.

2-20

■ Type B

While the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

OIG036012

• Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

OFF → HIGH ( )

→

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.

OIG036013

• The seat warmer starts to automatically control the seat temperature from High to Low in order to prevent low-temperature burns after being manually turned ON and after 30 minutes have past.

If High temperature is selected again within 5 minutes, the seat temperature will automatically drop to Low after approximately 10minutes have past.

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the ignitions switch is in the ON position.

i

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

Front air ventilation seat

(if equipped)

OIG036055

The air ventilation seats are provided to cool the front seats by blowing air through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks.

When the operation of the air ventilation seat is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

While the engine is running, push the switch to cool the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

• Each time you push the switch, the airflow changes as follows:

OFF → HIGH ( )

LOW ( )

→

MIDDLE ( )

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the air ventilation seat operating, the operation will turn OFF.

• The air ventilation seats defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is placed to the ON position.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the air ventilation seat:

• Use the air ventilation seat ONLY when the climate control system is on. Using the air ventilation seat for prolonged periods of time with the climate control system off could cause the air ventilation seat to malfunction.

(Continued)

2

2-21


(Continued)

• Never use a solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Avoid spilling liquids on the surface of the front seats and seatbacks; this may cause the air vent holes to become blocked and not work properly.

• Do not place materials such as plastic bags or newspapers under the seats. They may block the air intake causing the air vents to not work properly.

• Do not change the seat covers. It may damage the air ventilation seat.

• If the air vents do not operate, restart the vehicle. If there is no change, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

OIG036021

While the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the rear seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

i

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

2-22

S EA T B LT S

This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things not to do when using seat belts.

Seat belt safety precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags (if equipped) are designed to supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most countries require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts:

• ALWAYS properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear seats.

• NEVER allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them in the seat.

• NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupant’s lap.

• NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.

• Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

• Never wear a seat belt over fragile objects. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the seat belt can damage it.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

• Do not use a seat belt if the webbing or hardware is damaged.

• Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.

• NEVER unfasten the seat belt while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

(Continued)

2

2-23


(Continued)

• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

WARNING

Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing.

• Damaged hardware.

• The entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent.

Seat belt warning light

Seat belt warning

■ For driver and passenger in instrument cluster

OLMB033022

As a reminder to the driver and front passenger (if equipped), the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate and warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON if the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you start to drive the illuminated warning light will Illuminate.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 20 km/h the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

(if equipped)

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 20 km/h, the seat belt warning light will Illuminate until the seat belt is fastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 20 km/h, the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately

100 seconds and the seat belt warning light will blink.

(if equipped)

2-24

WARNING

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the front passenger's seat belt warning system. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger to properly be seated as instructed in this manual.

Seat belt restraint system

Lap/shoulder belt

i

Information

• Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warning light will blink or illuminate for 6 seconds.

• The front passenger's seat belt warning may operate when luggage is placed on the front passenger seat.

ODH033055

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).

There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

ODH033053

You should place the lap belt (1) portion across your hips and the shoulder belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

2-25

2


■ Front seat

ODH033057

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

OIG036022

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the four different positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

2-26

OLMB033025

WARNING

Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:

• Position the lap portion of the seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly. This allows your strong pelvic bones to absorb the force of the crash, reducing the chance of internal injuries.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Position one arm under the shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illustration.

• Always position the shoulder belt anchor into locked position at the appropriate height.

• Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be used.

WARNING

Always have the metal tab (A) inserted into the buckle (A').

OIG036065 i

Information

If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

2

OIG036023

Rear center seatbelt

Pull the metal tab (B) and insert it (B) into the buckle (B'). There will be an audible “click” when the tab locks into the buckle. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

2-27


Pre-tensioner seat belt

(Driver and front passenger)

OLMB033039

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's Pre-tensioner

Seat Belts. The purpose of the pretensioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

WARNING

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

• Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an accident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

2-28

(Continued)

• Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioner can become hot and can burn you.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the vehicle may damage the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

Therefore, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OLMB033040/Q

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration above:

(1) SRS air bag warning light

(2) Retractor pre-tensioner

(3) SRS control module

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch is placed to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, we recommend the pre-tensioner seat belts and/or SRS air bags be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions.

• The pre-tensioners will be activated even if the seat belts are not worn at the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

2

2-29


Additional seat belt safety precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt.

Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY across your hips and pelvic bone, under the rounded part of the belly.

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

Most countries have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among countries, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat. For more information refer to the “Child Restraint Systems” in this chapter.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a child restraint appropriate for the child’s height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving.The violent forces created during an accident will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your country. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets

Safety Standard of your country. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to “Child Restraint

Systems” in this chapter.

2-30

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat must always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system and/or seat belts in the rear seat.

If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck, they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Always make sure larger children’s seat belts are worn and properly adjusted.

• NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the child’s neck or face.

• Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.

Seat belt use and injured people

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down


(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.


During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.


2

2-31


WARNING

• NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

• Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

• Driver and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. We recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

2-32

C HIIL ES TR T S YS EM

Our recommendation:

Children always in the rear

WARNING

Always properly restrain children in the vehicle. Children of all ages are safer when riding in the rear seats. Never place a rearwardfacing Child Restraint System on the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.

Children under age 13 should always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Children too large for a

Child Restraint System must use the seat belts provided.

CR S))

Most countries have regulations which require children to travel in approved Child Restraint Systems.

The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of

Child Restraint System differs among countries, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling.

Child Restraint Systems must be properly installed in the vehicle seat.

Always use a commercially available

Child Restraint System that meets the requirements of your country.

Child Restraint System (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rearwardfacing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the

Child Restraint System.

2

2-33


WARNING

• Always follow the Child Restraint

System manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

• Always properly restrain your child in the Child Restraint

System.

• Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that “hooks” over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.

• After an accident, we recommend a HYUNDAI dealer to check the Child Restraint

System, seat belts, ISOFIX anchorages and top-tether anchorages.

Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a Child Restraint

System for your child, always:

• Make sure the Child Restraint

System has a label certifying that it meets applicable Safety Standards of your country.

• Select a Child Restraint System based on your child’s height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this information.

• Select a Child Restraint System that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.

• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation and use provided with the Child

Restraint System.

Child Restraint System types

There are three main types of Child

Restraint Systems: rearward-facing, forward-facing and booster Child

Restraint Systems.

They are classified according to the child’s age, height and weight.

2-34

OIG036024

Rearward-facing Child Restraint

System

A rearward-facing Child Restraint

System provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the Child Restraint Systems and reduce the stress to the fragile neck and spinal cord.

All children under the age of one year must always ride in a rearward-facing

Child Restraint System. There are different types of rearward-facing Child

Restraint Systems: infant-only Child

Restraint Systems can only be used rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-

1 Child Restraint Systems typically have higher height and weight limits for the rearward-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rearwardfacing for a longer period of time.

Keep using Child Restraint Systems in the rearward-facing position as long as children fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the Child

Restraint System's manufacturer.

OIG026004

Forward-facing Child Restraint

System

A forward-facing Child Restraint System provides restraint for the child’s body with a harness. Keep children in a forward-facing Child Restraint System with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your Child Restraint System’s manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing Child Restraint System, your child is ready for a booster seat.

2

2-35


Booster seats

A booster seat is a Child Restraint

System designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the stronger parts of your child’s body. Keep your children in booster seats until they are big enough to fit in a seat belt properly.

For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie comfortable across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie comfortable across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

WARNING

Before installing your Child

Restraint System always:

Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System.

Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a Child

Restraint System, the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

After selecting a proper Child Restraint

System for your child and checking that the Child Restraint System fits properly on the seating position, there are three general steps for a proper installation:

• Properly secure the Child Restraint

System to the vehicle.

All Child

Restraint Systems must be secured to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX anchorage and/or with the support leg.

• Make sure the Child Restraint

System is firmly secured.

After installing a Child Restraint System to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A Child Restraint

System secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.

2-36

When installing a Child Restraint

System, adjust the vehicle seat and seatback (up and down, forward and rearward) so that your child fits in the Child Restraint System in a confortable manner.

• Secure the child in the Child

Restraint System.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the

Child Restraint System according to the Child Restraint System manufacturer’s instructions.

CAUTION

A Child Restraint System in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the

Child Restraint System.

ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage (ISOFIX anchorage system) for children

The ISOFIX system holds a Child

Restraint System during driving and in an accident.This system is designed to make installation of the Child Restraint

System easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your

Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the Child

Restraint System. The ISOFIX system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the Child Restraint

System to the rear seats.

ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each ISOFIX seating position that will accommodate a

Child Restraint System with lower attachments.

To use the ISOFIX system in your vehicle, you must have a Child Restraint

System with ISOFIX attachments.

The Child Restraint System manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the Child

Restraint System with its attachments for the ISOFIX anchorages.

OLF034036

ISOFIX anchorages have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a Child

Restraint System using ISOFIX anchorages in the rear center seating position. There are no

ISOFIX anchorages provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchorages, for the CRS installation on the rear center seating position, can damage the anchorages.

2-37

2


ISOFIX Anchorage

Position Indicator

ISOFIX Anchorage

OIG036027

ISOFIX anchorages are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions, indicated by the symbols .

To use the ISOFIX anchorages, push the upper portion of the ISOFIX anchorage cover.

Securing a Child Restraint

System with the “ISOFIX

Anchorage System”

To install an ISOFIX-compatible Child

Restraint System in either of the rear outboard seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away from the ISOFIX anchorages.

2. Move any other objects away from the anchorages that could prevent a secure connection between the

Child Restraint System and the

ISOFIX anchorages.

3. Place the Child Restraint System on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the ISOFIX anchorages according to the instructions provided by the Child Restraint System manufacturer.

4. Follow the instructions of the Child

Restraint System's manufacturer for proper installation and connection of the ISOFIX attachments on the Child Restraint System to the

ISOFIX anchorages.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the ISOFIX system:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your Child Restraint System.

• To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a single anchorage. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.

• Always have the ISOFIX system inspected by your dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the ISOFIX system and may not properly secure the Child Restraint System.

2-38


System seat with “Top-tether

Anchorage” system

OIG036025

Top-tether anchorages for Child

Restraint Systems are located on the package tray.

OIG036026

1. Route the Child Restraint System top-tether strap over the seatback.

Placing the top tether strap, please follow the instructions of the Child

Restraint System manufacturer.

2. Connect the top-tether strap to the top-tether anchorage, then tighten the top-tether strap according to the instructions of your Child Restraint

System's manufacturer to firmly attach the Child Restraint System to the seat.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when installing the top-tether:

• Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your Child Restraint System.

• NEVER attach more than one

Child Restraint System to a single ISOFIX top-tether anchorage. This could cause the anchorage or attachment to come loose or break.

• Do not attach the top-tether to anything other than the correct top-tether anchorage. It may not work properly if attached to something else.

• Child Restraint System anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted Child Restraint

System.

Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

2-39

2


Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations

(for Europe)

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

Mass Group

Carrycot

0 : UP to 10kg

0+ : UP to 13kg

I : 9 to 18kg

D

C

B

B1

A

F

G

D

C

E

E

ISO/L1

ISO/L2

ISO/R1

ISO/R1

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/F2

ISO/F2X

ISO/F3

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX Forward-Facing Child Restraint Systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.

IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific vehicle",

"restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.

X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX Child Restraint System in this mass group and/or this size class.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost position of the passenger seat.

* ISOFIX Child Restraint System size classes and fixtures

2-40

Size Class Fixture

Front Passenger

Rear Outboard

(Driver side)

X

X

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

Rear Outboard

(Passenger side)

X

X

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

IUF, IL

Rear Center

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

(height 720mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint

System (height 650mm)

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape

Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System

F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)


System with a lap/shoulder belt

When not using the ISOFIX system, all Child Restraint Systems must be secured to a rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

OLMB033044

Installing a Child Restraint System with a lap/shoulder belt

To install a Child Restraint System on the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the Child Restraint System on a rear seat and route the lap/ shoulder belt around or through the

Child Restraint System, following the Child Restraint System manufacturer’s instructions. Make sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

ODH033063

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.

i

Information

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

OLMB033046

3. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the Child Restraint System while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

4. Push and pull on the Child Restraint

System to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place.

If your Child Restraint System manufacturer recommends the use of a top-tether with the lap/shoulder belt, see page 2-40.

To remove the Child Restraint System, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the Child Restraint System and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

2-41

2


Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to

ECE regulations (for Europe)

Mass group

Front passenger

Airbag activated

Airbag deeactivated

Seating position

Outboard left

Second row

Center

(3 point belt)

Outboard right

0 : Up to 10 kg

(0 - 9 months)

0+ : Up to 13 kg

(0 - 2 years)

I : 9 kg to 10 kg

(9 months - 4 years)

II : 15 kg to 25 kg

(15 to 25 kg)

II & III: 22 kg to 36 kg

(22 to 36 kg)

X

X

X

UF

UF

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U

U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group

UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group

X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group

WARNING

We recommend that a child restraint seat be installed in the rear seat.

2-42

R B AG - S UP LE EN L R ES AIIN T S TE M

1. Driver’s front air bag

2. Passenger’s front air bag

3. Side air bag*

4. Curtain air bag*

5. Driver’s knee air bag*

* : if equipped

2

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OIG036028

2-43


Vehicles are equipped with a

Supplemental Air Bag System for the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seats.

The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

2-44

Where are the air bags?

Driver’s and passenger’s front air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which are located in the center of the steering wheel, in the driver’s side lower crash pad below the steering wheel

(if equipped), and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the letters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad covers.

■ Driver’s front air bag

■

Driver’s knee air bag

■

Passenger’s front air bag

OIG036029 OIG036031

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

OIG037030L

2

2-45


WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating front air bags, take the following precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

• Never lean against the door or center console.

• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

• Do not attach any objects on front windshield and inside mirror.

Side air bags (if equipped)

■ Front seat

■ Rear seat

OIG036034

OIG036035

2-46

OIG036036

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front and/or rear seat.

The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s driver and/or the front and outboard rear passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

• Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

• Hold the steering wheel at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

• Do not use any accessory seat covers. This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

• Do not hang other objects except clothes. In an accident it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury especially when air bag is inflated.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

• Do not place any objects between the door and the seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.

• Do not cause impact to the doors when the ignition switch is in the ON position or this may cause the side air bags to inflate.

• If the seat or seat cover is damaged, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2-47

2


Curtain air bags (if equipped)

OIG036037

OIG036070L

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.

The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bags, take the following precautions:

• All seat occupants must wear seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Properly secure Child Restraint

System as far away from the door as possible.

• Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang other objects except clothes, especially hard or breakable objects. In an accident, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

• Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

• Do not open or repair the side curtain air bags.

2-48

How does the air bags system operate?

(10) Side pressure sensors

The SRSCM continually monitors

SRS components except for buckle sensor while the ignition switch is in the ON position to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pretensioner seat belt deployment.

SRS warning light

ODH033104L/Q

The SRS consists of the following components:

(1) Driver's front air bag module/

Driver’s knee air bag module

(2) Passenger's front air bag module

(3) Side air bag modules

(4) Curtain air bag modules

(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

(6) Air bag warning light

(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)

(8) Front impact sensors

(9) Side impact sensors

The SRS (Supplement Restraint

System) air bag warning light on the instrument panel displays the air bag symbol depicted in the illustration.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential problem with your air bag system.

WARNING

If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

• The light does not turn on for approximately six seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the engine is running.

We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the

SRS as soon as possible if any of these conditions occur.

2-49

2


During a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags, at the time and with the force needed.

The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or rollover by supporting the side upper body area.

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

• To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

2-50

■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag.

The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs space to inflate. It is recommended that drivers sit as far as possible between the center of the steering wheel and the chest while still maintaining control of the vehicle.


OLMB033056

■ Passenger’s front air bag


OLMB033054

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

OLMB033055

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the front passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

OLMB033057

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

2

2-51


WARNING

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.

• Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.

What to expect after an air bag inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.

WARNING

After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflating air bag.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not touch the air bag storage area’s internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.

• Always wash exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and mild soap.

• We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.

Air bags are designed to be used only once.

2-52

Noise and smoke from inflating air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger seat

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYDESA2042

OLM034310

Never install a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. An inflating air bag can forcefully strike a child or restraint resulting in serious or fatal injury.

WARNING

• Extreme hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

• NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI-

OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

• Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.

2-53

2


Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision?

Air bags are not designed to inflate in every collision.

There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

(if equipped)

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death:

• Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

• Do not perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine part. This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deployment performance.

• Place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inadvertent air bag deployment.

• We recommend that all air bag repairs are conducted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2-54

1. SRS control module

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side Impact Sensor (Front door)*

4. Side Impact Sensor (B-Pillar)*

5. Side Impact Sensor (C-Pillar)*

*: if equipped

2

OIG036039/OIG036040/OIG036041/OIG036042/OIG036043/OIG036044

2-55


Air bag inflation conditions

OIG036045

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the severity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

OIG036038

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

OIG036046

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

2-56

Air bag non-inflation conditions

OIG036047

In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.

OIG036048

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.

OIG036049

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.

2

2-57


ODH033076

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

OIG036050

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such

“underride” collisions.

OLF034057

Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

i

Information

The side and/or curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

2-58

OIG036051

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

SRS care

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position, or continuously remains on, we recommend that the system be immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

We recommend any work on the

SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death take the following precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box.

• Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

• We recommend that inflated air bags be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

2-59

2


(Continued)

• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for the necessary information.

Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of personal injury.

Additional safety precautions

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving.

A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat belts.

Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front seats.

Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the ignition switch is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

2-60

Air bag warning labels (if equipped)

■ Type A ■ Type B

OIG036053L OIG036053L

Air bag warning labels are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owner’s Manual.

2

2-61

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4

Remote key .......................................................................3-4

Remote key precautions..................................................3-6

Smart key ...........................................................................3-7

Smart key precautions...................................................3-11

Immobilizer system ..............................................3-14

Door locks .............................................................3-15

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .....3-15

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ........3-16

Auto door lock/unlock features ................................3-19

Child-protector rear door locks ..................................3-19

Theft-alarm system.............................................3-20

Driver position memory system.........................3-21

Storing memory positions .............................................3-21

Easy access function .....................................................3-22

Steering wheel......................................................3-23

Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-23

Tilt steering / Telescope steering...............................3-24

Heated steering wheel...................................................3-25

Horn....................................................................................3-25

Mirrors...................................................................3-26

Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-26

Outside rearview mirror ..............................................3-27

Reverse parking aid function.......................................3-30

Windows ................................................................3-31

Power windows................................................................3-31

Panorama sunroof ...............................................3-36

Sunroof open warning...................................................3-37

Sunshade...........................................................................3-37

Sliding the sunroof ........................................................3-37

Tilting the sunroof ........................................................3-38

Closing the sunroof ........................................................3-38

Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-40

Trunk......................................................................3-41

Non-Powered Trunk.......................................................3-41

Power Trunk .....................................................................3-42

Emergency trunk safety release.................................3-45

Smart trunk ..........................................................3-47

Exterior features .................................................3-50

Hood ...................................................................................3-50

Fuel filler door .................................................................3-51

Emergency fuel filler lid release.................................3-54

Instrument cluster................................................3-55

Instrument cluster control ............................................3-56

LCD display control.........................................................3-56

Gauges ...............................................................................3-57

3

3

LCD display ...........................................................3-63

LCD modes ........................................................................3-63

Warning messages ..........................................................3-71

Trip computer .......................................................3-76

Trip modes ........................................................................3-76

Warning and indicator lights..............................3-80

Warning lights ..................................................................3-80

Indicator lights .................................................................3-86

Head up display (HUD)........................................3-92

Light .......................................................................3-94

Exterior lights ..................................................................3-94

Welcome system ...........................................................3-102

Interior lights..................................................................3-103

Wipers and washers ..........................................3-107

Windshield wipers ........................................................3-107

Windshield washers ....................................................3-109

Driver assist system ..........................................3-111

Rear view camera .........................................................3-111

Rear parking assist system ........................................3-112

Parking assist system ..................................................3-115

Around View Monitoring (AVM) System.................3-118

Defroster.............................................................3-119

Rear window defroster ...............................................3-119

Manual climate control system........................3-120

Heating and air conditioning......................................3-122

System operation..........................................................3-127

System maintenance ....................................................3-129

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant ...........................................3-129

Automatic climate control system ..................3-131

Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-133

Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-134

System operation..........................................................3-141

System maintenance ....................................................3-143

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant ...........................................3-143

Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-145

Manual climate control system .................................3-145

Automatic climate control system ............................3-146

Defogging logic..............................................................3-147

Climate control additional features.................3-149

Cluster ionizer................................................................3-149

Sunroof inside air recirculation.................................3-149

Automatic ventilation ...................................................3-149

Storage compartment........................................3-150

Center console storage ...............................................3-150

Glove box ........................................................................3-151

Sunglass holder ..........................................................3-151

Cellular phone holder...................................................3-152

Wireless cellular phone charging system ...............3-152

Interior features ...............................................3-154

Ashtray ............................................................................3-154

Cup holder.......................................................................3-154

Sunvisor...........................................................................3-155

Power outlet...................................................................3-156

Cigarette lighter ............................................................3-157

Clock.................................................................................3-158

Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-158

Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................3-159

Rear curtain....................................................................3-159

Side curtain.....................................................................3-160


A CC ES SIIN G Y OU R V HIIC E

Remote key

OIG046001L

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and trunk) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Trunk Unlock

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and trunk.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on the remote key.

3. The doors will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink. Also, the outside rearview mirror will fold, if

“Mirror auto folding” is set in the

User Settings Mode of Cluster.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2) on the remote key.

2. The doors will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Also, the outside rearview mirror will unfold, if “Mirror auto folding” is set in the User Settings Mode of

Cluster.

i

Information

After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

3-4

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the remote key for more than one second.

2. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

i

Information

The word "HOLD" is written on the button to inform you that you must press and hold the button for more than one second.

Start-up

For detailed information refer to “Key

Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.

Mechanical key

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the remote key:

• Keep the remote key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the remote key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction, excluding the car from the warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the remote key.

• Protect the remote key from extreme temperatures.

OIG046004L

If the remote key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button.

NOTICE

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.

3

3-5


Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).

• The remote key battery is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The remote key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the remote key.

When the remote key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the remote key, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the remote key and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

i

Information

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

Keep the remote key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

OPD046002

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the cover.

2. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. Make sure the battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the remote key.

3-6

If you suspect your remote key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your remote key is not working correctly, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Smart key

■ Conventional smart key (3 buttons) i

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) and regulation.

■ Conventional smart key (4 buttons)

OIG046063L

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and trunk) and even start the engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Trunk Unlock

4. Remote start

3

OIG046066L

■ Card type smart key

OIG046003

3-7


Locking

i

Information

The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within

0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside door handle.

Unlocking

OIG046054

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and trunk.

2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button

(1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink. Also, the outside rearview mirror will fold, if “Mirror auto folding” is set in the User Settings

Mode of Cluster.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

• Any door except the trunk is open.

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the Engine Start/

Stop button and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

OIG046054

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.

3. The doors will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Also, the outside rearview mirror will unfold, if “Mirror auto folding” is set in the User Settings Mode of

Cluster.

3-8

i

Information

• The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside door handle. Other people can also open the doors without the smart key in possession.

• After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the trunk handle button or press the Trunk Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one second.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically.

i

Information

After unlocking the trunk, the trunk will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless the trunk is opened.

Remote start (if equipped,

For Middle East)

You can start the engine and turn on the climate system by pressing the remote start button (4) outside the vehicle.

To start and stop engine remotely :

1. Press the door lock button (1), and then the hazard warning lights blink once to alert you.

2. Press the remote start button (4) for more than 2 seconds to start engine within 4 seconds after pressing the door lock button (1).

3. While remote starting, the hazard warning lights blink. If you want to stop the engine, press the remote start button (4) again.

The climate system will be continuously maintained, as selected when the engine is restarted. If the climate system turned off before you stopped the engine, the climate system does not operate when you start the engine remotely.

If someone without a designated smart key rides your vehicle while remote starting, the engine is automatically stopped for security.

i

Information

After remotely starting the engine, the engine will turn off automatically after 10 minutes if you do not ride your vehicle.

CAUTION

• The remote start will not work if you exceed the operating distance limit (about 30 m).

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods to obey the emission regulations in your country.

• Laws in your country may restrict the use of remote start.

You should check country regulations before using this remote starting system.

• It is only possible to start the engine remotely when the shift lever is in P(Parking) position.

• If the hood or the trunk is opened, you can’t start the engine remotely.

3-9

3


Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key.

For detailed information refer to the Engine

Start/Stop button in chapter 5.

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the smart key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction, excluding the car from the warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.

• Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.

NOTICE

Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehicle, the vehicle battery may be discharged.

OPD046045

Conventional smart key

Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

ODH043003

Card type smart key

Push and hold the release lever (1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, push and hold the release lever (1) and put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

3-10

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, it is recommended that you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining key to your authorized

HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

Smart key precautions

The smart key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

• The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

• Another vehicle’s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

3

3-11

Convenient features of your vehicle i

Information

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

Restrictions in Handling Keys

NOTICE

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

OIG046005

When leaving keys with parking lot and valet attendants, the following procedures will ensure your vehicle’s glove box compartment can only be opened with the mechanical key.

To lock:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Smart Key.

2. Lock the glove box using the mechanical key.

3. Leave the smart key with the attendant and keep the mechanical key with you.

The Smart Key can only be used to start the engine and operate door locks.

To unlock:

Open the glove box with the mechanical key.

3-12

Battery replacement Card type smart key

OIG046056L

If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Conventional smart key


To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart key.


3. Reinstall the rear cover of the smart key.

OAG044004


To Replace the Battery:

1. Pull out the battery and battery cover.


3. Reinstall the battery cover and battery.

If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, it is recommended that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) and regulation.

3

3-13


IIM MO LIIZ ER ST EM F E QU PE

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of the key, it is recommended that you contact your

HYUNDAI dealer.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, the system does not recognize the coding of the key.

Place the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, then place the ignition switch to the ON position again.

The system may not recognize your key’s coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e., key chain) is near the key. The engine may not start because the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential.

NOTICE

The transponder in your key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

3-14

D OO R L CK S

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

Mechanical key

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage to the cover and to lose it while removing the cover.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Remote key

OIG046006

First, remove the cover (1~2), and then turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock (3).

If you lock/unlock the driver's door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.


OIG046001L

To lock the doors, press the Door

Lock button (1) on the remote key.

To unlock the doors, press the Door

Unlock button (2) on the remote key.


i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

3-15

3


Smart key

To unlock the doors, press the button on the outside door handle while carrying the smart key with you or press the door unlock button (2) on the smart key.



Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

OIG046054

OIG046063L

To lock the doors, press the button on the outside door handle while carrying the smart key with you or press the door lock button (1) on the smart key.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

U n ll ll o c k // // L o c k

OIG046007

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position.

The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

3-16

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is open.

• Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.

i

Information

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.

WARNING

Do not pull the inner door handle of the driver’s or passenger’s door while the vehicle is moving.

With the central door lock switch (if equipped)

■ Driver’s door

■ Front passenger’s door

OIG046008

OIG046009

When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

3

3-17


• If the key is in the ignition switch and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

• If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

WARNING

• The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.

• Do not pull the inner door handle of the driver's or passenger's door while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a long time while the weather is very hot or cold, there are risks of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when someone is in the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle

Leaving your vehicle unlocked increases the potential risk to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while depressing the brake, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (for automatic transaxle) or first gear or R (Reverse, for manual transaxle), engage the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.

WARNING

Opening a door when something is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

3-18

Auto door lock/unlock features

Impact sensing door unlock system

All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Child-protector rear door locks

To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screwdriver) into the hole and turn it to the lock position.

To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.

Speed sensing door lock system

All doors will be automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 mph).

You can activate or deactivate the

Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to

"LCD Display" in this chapter.

OIG046010

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position

(1), the rear door will not open if the inner door handle (2) is pulled.

WARNING

If children accidently open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

3

3-19


T HE TLA SY ST M

This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occurs:

- A door is opened without using the remote key or smart key.

- The trunk is opened without using the remote key or smart key.

- The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the trunk from outside the vehicle with the remote key or smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handles with the smart key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink to indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the trunk, or the hood without using the remote key or smart key will cause the alarm to activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if the hood, the trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the hood, the trunk, or the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

i

Information

• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the remote key or smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and place the ignition switch in the ON position (for remote key) or start the engine (for smart key) and wait for 30 seconds.

• When the system is disarmed but a door or trunk is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

OJC040170 i

Information

Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm system will have a label attached to the vehicle with the following words:

1. WARNING

2. SECURITY SYSTEM

3-20

D RIIV R P SIIT N M MO Y S ST M ((IIF EQ UIIP D))

WARNING

Never attempt to operate the driver position memory system while the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

OIG046038

The Driver Position Memory System is provided to store and recall the following memory settings with a simple button operation.

- Driver's seat position

- Outside rearview mirror position

- Instrument panel illumination intensity

- Head Up Display (HUD) position, brightness and rotation i

Information

• If the battery is disconnected, the memory settings will be erased.

• If the Driver Position Memory

System does not operate normally, we recommend that you have the system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Storing memory positions

1. Move the shift lever into P while the ignition switch or the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

2. Adjust the driver's seat position, outside rearview mirror position , instrument panel illumination intensity and head-up display height/brightness to the desired position.

3. Press the SET button. The system will beep once and notify you

"Press button to save settings"on the LCD display.

4. Press one of the memory buttons

(1 or 2) within about 4 seconds.

The system will beep twice when the memory has been successfully stored.

5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will appear on the LCD display.

3

3-21


Recalling memory position

1. Move the shift lever into P, instrument panel illumination intensity and head-up display height/brightness while the ignition switch or the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position.

2. Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2). The system will beep once, then the driver’s seat position, outside rearview mirror, instrument panel illumination intensity and head-up display height/brightness will automatically adjust to the stored position (if equipped).

3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will appear on the LCD display.

i

Information

• While recalling the "1" memory position, pressing the SET or 1 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memory position. Pressing the 2 button recalls the "2" memory position.

• While recalling the "2" memory position, pressing the SET or 2 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memory position. Pressing the 1 button recalls the "1" memory position.

• While recalling the stored positions, pressing one of the control buttons for the driver's seat, outside rearview mirror, instrument panel illumination, or head-up display will cause the movement of that component to stop and move in the direction that the control button is pressed.

Easy access function

(if equipped)

The system will move the driver's seat automatically as follows:

The shift lever is in P.

• Without smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the ignition key is removed.

- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the ignition key is inserted.

• With smart key system

- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the Engine Start/Stop button is changed to the OFF position.

- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the Engine Start/Stop button is changed to the ACC or

START position.


Easy Access Function from the User

Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

3-22

S TE RIIN WH EE

Electric power steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

Also, the steering effort becomes heavier as the vehicle’s speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed decreases for better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will illuminate on the instrument cluster.

The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate. Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.

i

Information

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.

This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics.

When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the ignition switch is placed to the ON or LOCK/OFF position (Without Smart key system).

A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON or OFF position.

(With Smart key system)

• Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

• When the vehicle is stationary, if you turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel effort increases.

This is not a system malfunction. As time passes, the steering wheel effort will return to its normal condition.

3

3-23


Tilt steering / Telescope steering

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, death or accidents.

i

Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lockrelease lever may not lock the steering wheel.

It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

OIG046059

Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on the steering wheel column and adjust the steering wheel angle (2) and position (3). Move the steering wheel, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

After adjusting, pull up the lockrelease lever (1) to lock the steering wheel in place. Push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position. Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.

3-24

Heated steering wheel

(if equipped)

■ Type A

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

Horn

i

Information

The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

When the engine is turned off during the engine and the heated steering wheel is on, the timer function of heated steering wheel will be reset.

To reuse heated steering wheel, press button again.

■ Type B

OIG046041

OIG046042

When the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the engine is running, press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

NOTICE

Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. This cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.

OIG046043

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

NOTICE

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

3

3-25


MIIR RO S

Inside rearview mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the center on the view through the rear window.

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area, or behind the rear headrests which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Day/night rearview mirror

Night

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Day

OIG046057

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

3-26

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlamp of the car behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror. The sensor detects the light level around the vehicle, and automatically adjusts to control the headlamp glare from vehicles behind you.

Whenever the shift lever is placed in

R (Reverse), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.

II n d ii c a tt tt o rr

Outside rearview mirror

OIG046044

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

OIG046047

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors.

The mirror can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch.

The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

3

3-27


WARNING

• The right outside rearview mirror is convex. In some countries, the left outside rearview mirror is also convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror or turn your head and look to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while driving.

This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

CAUTION

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

OIG046048

Adjusting the rearview mirrors:

Move the lever (1) to the L (Left) or R

(Right) to select the rearview mirror you would like to adjust.

Use the mirror adjustment control (2) to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, move the lever (1) to the middle to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

3-28

NOTICE

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand or the motor may be damaged.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

• With smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key.

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door handle.

- The mirror will unfold when you approach the vehicle (all doors closed and locked) with a smart key in possession. (if equipped)

OIG046049

The outside rearview mirror can be folded or unfolded by pressing the switch.

If “Mirror auto folding” is set in the

User Settings Mode of the cluster, the outside mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows :

• Without smart key system

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the transmitter.

NOTICE

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the ON position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.

If you fold the outside mirror by pushing the switch, the mirror will not unfold automatically when the door is unlocked by the transmitter, even when the “Mirror auto folding” is set in the cluster.

3

3-29


NOTICE

Do not fold the electric type outside rearview mirror by hand. It could cause motor failure.

Reverse parking aid function

(if equipped)

The outside rearview mirrors will automatically revert to their original positions if any of the following occur:

The ignition switch is pressed to either the LOCK/OFF position or the

ACC position.

• The shift lever is moved to any position except R (Reverse).

• The remote control outside rearview mirror switch is not selected.

OIG046064L

When you move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position, the outside rearview mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid with driving in reverse.

The position of the outside rearview mirror switch (1) determines whether or not the mirrors will move:

Left/Right : When either the L (Left) or

R (Right) switch is selected, both outside rearview mirrors will move.

Neutral : When neither switch is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will not move.

3-30

WIIN DO S

Power windows

OIG046023

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window

(7) Power window lock switch

3

3-31


The ignition switch must be in the ON position to be able to raise or lower the windows. Each door has a Power

Window switch to control that door's window. The driver has a Power

Window Lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows.

The power windows will operate for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. However, if the front doors are opened, the Power

Windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

OIG046024

To open:

Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.

WARNING

Do not install any accessories on the windows. The automatic reverse feature may not operate.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.

3-32

Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

If the window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, remove the objects and close the window.

Automatic reversal (if equipped)

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, it is recommended that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OIG046025

If a window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 30 cm

(12 inches) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).

WARNING

If the power window switch is continuously pulled up within 5 seconds after lowering the window by the automatic window reverse feature, the automatic window reverse will not operate.

i

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only active when the “Auto Up” feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.

3-33

3


WARNING

The automatic reverse feature doesn’t activate while resetting the power window system.

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 4 mm (0.16

inch) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.

Power window lock switch

OIG046026

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch is pressed:

• The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.

• The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.

• The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passengers' power window.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional window operation by a child.

3-34

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING

• NEVER leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running.

• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.

• Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock switch in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury can result from unintentional window operation by the child.

• Do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

3

3-35


P AN RA A S RO OF

OIG046032

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

EQ UIIP D))

WARNING

A panorama sunroof is made of glass, therefore it may break in an accident. If you do not have your seat belt on, you may go through the broken glass and get injured or killed. For all passengers safety, have an appropriate protection on. (ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.)

The ignition switch must be in the ON position before you can open or close the sunroof.

NOTICE

Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted.

Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

3-36

WARNING

• Make sure heads, other body parts or objects are out of the way before using the sunroof.

• Do not leave the engine running and the key in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could operate the sunroof, which could result in serious injury.

WARNING

Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

Sunroof open warning

(if equipped)

If the driver removes the ignition key

(smart key: turns off the engine) when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for approximately 4 seconds and above warning illustration will appear on the

LCD display.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

Sunshade Sliding the sunroof

When the sunshade is closed

OIG046033

• To open the sunshade, pull the sunroof control lever(1) backward to the first detent position.

• To close the sunshade when the sunroof glass is closed, push the sunroof control lever(1) forward to the first detent position.

To stop the sliding at any point, press the sunshade control switch momentarily.

OIG046034

If you pull the sunroof control lever

(1) backward, the sunshade will slide all the way open then the sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever (1) momentarily.

3

3-37


When the sunshade is opened

If you pull the sunroof control lever backward, the sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

Tilting the sunroof

i

Information

Only the front glass of the panorama sunroof opens and closes.

Closing the sunroof

OIG046035

When the sunshade is closed

If you push the sunroof control lever

(1) upward, the sunshade will slide open then the sunroof glass will tilt.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever (1) momentarily.

OIG046036

To close the sunroof glass only

Push the sunroof control lever (1) forward to the first detent position.

When the sunshade is opened

If you push the sunroof control lever

(1) upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof glass with the sunshade

Push the sunroof control lever (1) forward to the second detent position.

The sunroof glass will close then the sunshade close automatically.

To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever

(1) momentarily.

3-38

Automatic reversal

WARNING

Object less than 4 mm(0.16 cm) in diameter caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse glass and the glass will not stop and reverse direction.

ODH043039

If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof glass or sunshade is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

WARNING

• Make sure heads, other body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the sunroof to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

• To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.

• Improper operation of the sunroof, especially by a child, may lead to an accident.

Never leave a child unattended in the vehicle.

• Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause injuries or vehicle damage.

NOTICE

• Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the sunroof guide rail or between the sunroof and roof panel, which can make a noise.

• Do not try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the motor could be damaged. In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly.

i

Information

After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

3

3-39


Resetting the sunroof

3. Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close

(about 10 seconds) until the sunroof slightly moves. Then, release the lever.

4. Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close until the sunroof operates as follows: i

Information

If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly.

Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open

→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide

Close → Sunshade Close

OIG046037

Sunroof needs to be reset if the following occurs:

- Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected

- The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally operate

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.

For more details, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

1. Turn the engine on and close the sunroof glass and sunshade completely.

2. Release the control lever (1).

3-40

T RU K

Non-Powered Trunk

(if equipped)

■ Outside

■ Inside

WARNING

Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the

Power Trunk. Wait until the trunk is open fully and stopped before loading or unloading cargo from the vehicle.

OIG046011

To open:

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

2. Then do one of the following :

- Press the button on the trunk handle after unlocking the door by remote key or smart key.

- Press the trunk unlock button of remote key or smart key for more than 1 second.

- Press the button on the trunk itself with the Smart Key in your possession.

OIG047012L

- Use the trunk release button.

3. Lift the trunk lid up.

To close:

Lower the trunk lid and press down until it locks.

WARNING

Always keep the trunk lid completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases containing carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle and serious illness or death may result.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the trunk lift cylinders and the attached hardware, always close the trunk before driving.

i Information

In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

3

3-41


Power Trunk (if equipped)

OIG047013L

(1) Power Trunk Main Control button (3) Power Trunk Close button

OIG046015

To open:


(Park) for your safety.

2. Then do one of the following:

- Press the Smart Key Trunk Unlock button for more than one second.

- Press the Open button (2) on the trunk. You need the Smart Key in your possession, when all doors are locked.

- Press the Power Trunk Main

Control button (1).

(2) Power Trunk Open button

OIG046014

(4) Power Trunk Lock button

OIG046016

3-42

To close:

Do one of the following:

- Press the Power Trunk Main

Control button (1) until the Power

Trunk is closed securely.

- Press the Close button (3) on the trunk.

- Press the Lock button (4) on the trunk while carrying the Smart Key with all the vehicle’s doors closed.

All doors will lock and arm the theft alarm system.

If you push a button or switch while the trunk is opening or closing, it could stop moving. Press any button to operate the Power Trunk again.

i Information

The Power Trunk Lock button will not work if you press the button when:

- Any door is open.

- The Engine Start/Stop button is not in the OFF position.

- The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

WARNING

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

Children or animals might operate the power trunk that could result in injury to themselves or others, or damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always keep the trunk lid completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases containing carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle and serious illness or death may result.

WARNING

Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the

Power Trunk. Wait until the trunk is open fully and stopped before loading or unloading cargo from the vehicle.

CAUTION

• Do not close or open the Power

Trunk manually. This may cause damage to the Power

Trunk. If it is necessary to close or open the Power Trunk manually when the battery is drained or disconnected, do not apply excessive force.

• Do not leave the Power Trunk open for a long period of time.

This may drain the battery.

• To prevent damage to the trunk lift cylinders and the attached hardware, always close the trunk before driving.

i Information

In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

3

3-43


Power Trunk Non-Opening or

Closing Conditions:

• The Power Trunk will not open or close automatically, when the vehicle is moving more than 3 km/h

(1.8 mph).

• The Power Trunk can be operated when the engine is not running.

However, the Power Trunk operation consumes large amounts of vehicle electric power. To prevent the battery from draining, do not operate it excessively (e.g., more than approximately 10 times repeatedly.)

• Do not modify or repair any part of the Power Trunk by yourself. This must be done by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Before jacking up the vehicle to change a tire or repair the vehicle, open the Power Trunk. Do not operate the Power Trunk when the vehicle is raised or this could cause the

Power Trunk to operate improperly.

• If there are obstacles such as snow on the Power Trunk, it may not open automatically. After removing the obstacle, try to open it again.

Automatic stop and reverse

OIG046017

If, during power opening or closing, the trunk is blocked by an object or part of someone’s body, the power trunk will detect the resistance and it will stop movement or move to the full open position to allow the object to be cleared.

However, if the resistance is weak such as from an object that is thin or soft, or the trunk is near the latched position, the automatic stop and reversal may not detect the resistance and the closing operation will continue. Also, if the Power Trunk is forced by a strong impact, the automatic stop and reversal may operate.

If the automatic stop and reverse feature operates more than twice during one opening or closing operation, the

Power Trunk may stop at that position. If this occurs, close the trunk manually and operate the trunk automatically again.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury and damage take the following precautions when operating the power trunk:

- Keep all faces, hands, arms, body parts and other objects away from the path of the power trunk.

- Do not intentionally place any body parts or objects in the path of the power trunk to make sure the automatic stop and reversal operates.

- Do not allow children to play with the power trunk.

3-44

To reset the power trunk

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, or if the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected, reset the Power Trunk as follows:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Close the trunk manually.

If the Power Trunk doesn't work properly after performing the above procedure, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Emergency trunk safety release

Inside the trunk

OIG046018

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Emergency Trunk Safety Release lever located inside the trunk. When someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, the trunk can be opened by moving the lever in the direction of the arrow and pushing the trunk open.

WARNING

• You and your passengers must be aware of the location of the Emergency Trunk

Safety Release lever in this vehicle and how to open the trunk in case you are accidentally locked in the trunk.

• NEVER allow anyone to occupy the trunk of the vehicle at any time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, serious injury or death could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather conditions. The trunk is also a highly dangerous location in the event of a crash because it is not a protected occupant space but is a part of the vehicle’s crush zone.

(Continued)

3

3-45


(Continued)

• Your vehicle should be kept locked and the Smart Key should be kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks.

• Use the release lever for emergencies only.

Inside the vehicle

When you can not unlock the trunk due to battery discharge or other reasons, you can unlock the trunk inside the vehicle.

OIG046061

Non-power trunk

Open the cable cover(1) under the rear seat with a mechanical key and pull the cable (2) for unlocking the trunk.

OIG046058

Power trunk

Open the cable cover (1) under the rear seat with a mechanical key. Pull the cable (2) to the right as much as you can, and then insert the cable loop between the plastic sticking out

(3) to keep the trunk unlocked.

Close the trunk after detaching the cable from the right side.

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage or lose the cable cover.

3-46

S MA T T RU NK F E QU PE i Information

• The Smart Trunk does not operate when:

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and is continuously detected.

- The smart key is detected within

15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and 1.5 m from the front door handles. (for vehicles equipped with Welcome Light)

- A door is not locked or closed.

- The smart key is in the vehicle.

OIG046019

On a vehicle equipped with a smart key, the trunk can be opened with no-touch activation using the Smart

Trunk system.

How to use the Smart Trunk

The trunk can be opened with notouch activation satisfying all the conditions below.

• After 15 seconds when all doors are closed and locked

• Positioned in the detecting area for more than 3 seconds.

1. Setting

To activate the Smart Trunk, go to

User Settings Mode and select

Smart Trunk on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

OIG046020

2. Detect and Alert

If you are positioned in the detecting area (50 ~100 cm behind the vehicle) carrying a smart key, the hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound to alert you the smart key has been detected and the trunk will open.

i Information

Do not approach the detecting area if you do not want the trunk to open. If you have unintentionally entered the detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime starts to operate, leave the detecting area with the smart key. The trunk will stay closed.

3-47

3


OIG046021

3. Automatic opening

The hazard warning lights will blink and chime will sound several times and then the trunk will slowly open.

WARNING

• Make sure you close the trunk before driving your vehicle.

• Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the trunk.

• Make sure objects in the trunk do not come out when opening the trunk on a slope. It may cause serious injury.

• Make sure to deactivate the

Smart Trunk when washing your vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk may open inadvertently.

• The key should be kept out of reach of children. Children may inadvertently open the

Smart Trunk while playing around the rear area of the vehicle.

How to deactivate the Smart

Trunk function using the smart key

OIG046063L

1. Door lock

2. Door unlock

3. Trunk open

If you press any button of the smart key during the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated.

Make sure to be aware of how to deactivate the Smart Trunk function for emergency situations.

3-48

i Information

• If you press the door unlock button

(2), the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open any door for 30 seconds, the smart trunk function will be activated again.

• If you press the trunk open button

(3) for more than 1 second, the trunk opens.

• If you press the door lock button (1) or trunk open button (3) when the

Smart Trunk function is not in the

Detect and Alert stage, the smart trunk function will not be deactivated.

• In case you have deactivated the

Smart Trunk function by pressing the smart key button and opened a door, the smart trunk function can be activated again by closing and locking all doors.

Detecting area

OIG046022

• The Smart Trunk operates with a welcome alert if the smart key is detected within 50~100 cm from the trunk.

• The alert stops at once if the smart key is positioned outside the detecting area during the Detect and Alert stage.

i Information

• The Smart Trunk function will not work if any of the following occurs:

- The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

- The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

- Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

• The detecting range may decrease or increase when :

- One side of the tire is raised to replace a tire or to inspect the vehicle.

- The vehicle is slantingly parked on a slope or unpaved road, etc.

3

3-49


E XT RIIO R F EA UR

Hood

Opening the hood

Hood open warning (if equipped)

The warning message will appear on the LCD display when hood is open.

The warning chime will operate when the vehicle is being driven at or above 3km/h with the hood open.

OIG046027

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

OIG046028

3. Raise the hood slightly, push the secondary latch up (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood

(2). After it has been raised about halfway, it will raise completely by itself.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

• All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted approximately 30cm from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the hood is secure.

If the hood can be lifted with a slight force, open the hood again and close it more firmly.

3-50

WARNING

• Before closing the hood, ensure all obstructions are removed from around hood opening.

• Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away.

Check there is no hood open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. If the hood is not latched while the vehicle is moving, the chime will sound to warn the driver the hood is not fully latched. Driving with the hood opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an accident, and the hood could fall or be damaged.

Fuel filler door

Opening the fuel filler door

OIG047029L

The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel filler door opener button.

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Push the fuel filler door opener button.

OIG046030

3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully open.

4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2), turn it counterclockwise. You may hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.

5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

3

3-51


Information

If the fuel filler door does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved deicer fluid (do not use radiator antifreeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it clockwise until it “clicks” one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is latched securely.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the potential build-up of static electricity by touching a metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling. You can generate a buildup of static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric capable of producing static electricity.

Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

3-52

(Continued)

• When refueling, always move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact between your bare hand and the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

• Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

• Do not use matches or a lighter and do not smoke or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station, especially during refueling.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause gasoline spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

i

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel Requirements" suggested in the Introduction chapter.

NOTICE

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

3

3-53


Emergency fuel filler lid release

NOTICE

Do not pull the handle excessively, otherwise the luggage area trim or release handle may be damaged.

OIG046031

If the fuel filler lid does not open using the remote fuel filler lid release, you can open it manually by pulling the handle outward slightly.

3-54

IIN ST RU ME T C ST R

■ Type A

■ Type B

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in this chapter.

3

OIG046100L/OIG046101L

3-55


Instrument cluster control

Instrument panel illumination

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG047052L

OIG047053L

When the vehicle's parking lights or headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.

LCD display control

■ Type A

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster while driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

■ Type B

• The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches to the maximum or minimum level, an alarm will sound.

OIG046460

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons.

(1) : MODE button for changing modes

(2) ▲ , ▼ : MOVE switch for changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the selected item

For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD

Display” in this chapter.

3-56

Gauges

Speedometer

■ km/h ■ MPH, km/h

Tachometer Engine Coolant Temperature gauge

■ Except Europe

■ For Europe

OIG046106

OIG046102/OIG046102L

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (MPH) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

OIG046104

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

OIG046106L

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

3-57

3


NOTICE

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the "130 or H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the Engine

Overheats" in chapter 6.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Fuel Gauge

■ Except Europe

■ For Europe

OIG046107 i

Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING

Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the "0 or E

(Empty)" level.

OIG046107L

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

NOTICE

Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

3-58

Outside Temperature Gauge

- User Settings Mode in the Cluster :

You can change the temperature unit in the “Other Features -

Temperature unit” .

- Automatic climate control system :

While pressing the OFF button, press the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

Icy Road Warning Light

(if equipped)

OIG046110

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).

- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C

(-40°F ~ 140°F)

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.

The temperature unit (from °C to °F or from °F to °C) can be changed as below procedures.

And, the temperature unit of the cluster and the climate control display is changed at the same time.

OLF046112L

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the following conditions occur, the warning light (including Outside

Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times and then illuminates, and also warning chime sounds only once for each ignition cycle.

- The temperature on the Outside

Temperature Gauge is below approximately 4°C (39°F).

3

3-59


Information

If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

Transaxle Shift Indicator

OIG046112

Automatic Transaxle Shift

Indicator (if equipped)

This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

• Park : P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

• Drive : D

• Manual shift Mode: 1~6 (6 speed automatic transaxle), 1~8 (8 speed automatic transaxle)

OLF046560L

Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator

(for Europe, if equipped)

In the manual shift mode, this indicator informs which gear is desired while driving to save fuel.

- 6 speed automatic transaxle

• Shifting up :

▲

2,

▲

3,

▲

4,

▲

5,

▲

6

• Shifting down :

▼

1,

▼

2,

▼

3,

▼

4,

▼

5

- 8 speed automatic transaxle

• Shifting up :

▲

2,

▲

3,

▲

4,

▲

5,

▲

6,

▲

7,

▲

8

• Shifting down :

▼

1,

▼

2,

▼

3,

▼

4,

▼

5,

▼

6,

▼

7

3-60

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or

1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th,

5th, or 6th gear).

Odometer

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

OLF046421

Shift Indicator Pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up that indicates the current gear position is displayed in the cluster for about 2 seconds when shifting into other positions (P/R/N/D).

OLF046559L

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

3

3-61


Distance to empty

OPD046138

• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will display “---” as distance to empty.

i

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correctly.

• The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.

• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters

(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

3-62

L CD DIIS PL Y

LCD modes

Modes

Trip Computer

Symbol Explanation

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.

For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT)

(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control (ASCC),

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) and Lane Keeping Assist

System(LKAS).

For more details, refer to “Advanced Smart Cruise Control (ASCC)”,

“Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)” and Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS) in chapter 5.

This mode displays information related to Driver Attention Alert and Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

For more information, refer to "Driver Attention Alert (DAA)" in chapter 5 and

"Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)“ in chapter 6.

User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.

Warning

This mode informs of the tire pressure information, service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages related to the advanced smart cruise control system, pre-active seat belt, and so on.

For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

3-63

3


Edit settings after shifting to P Quick guide (Help, if equipped)

If you press and hold the OK button in the User Settings Mode, explanation about the selected item is displayed in the cluster.

Trip computer mode

OAD045162L

This warning message illuminates if you try to select the other User

Settings item when driving.

For safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and moving the shift lever to P (Park) position.

OPDE046131

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.

For more details, refer to “Trip

Computer” in this chapter.

3-64

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

(if equipped)

Assist mode

OPDE046147

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

OIG056125

SCC/LKAS/LDWS/DAA

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Departure Warning System (LDWS)/

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) and Driver Attention Alert (DAA).

For more information, refer to each system information in chapter 5.

OIG046164L

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information related to Tire Pressure.

For more information, refer to

"Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)“ in chapter 6.

3

3-65


Warning message mode

If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed in the information mode for several seconds.

- Low washer fluid (if equipped)

- Smart high beam malfunction

(if equipped)

- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)

- Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)

- Advanced Smart Cruise Control malfunction (if equipped)

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS, if equipped)

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc.

1. Head Up Display (HUD, if equipped)

2. Driving Assist

3. Door

4. Lights

5. Sound

6. Convenience

7. Service interval

8. Other features

9. Reset

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

1. Head-Up Display (HUD, if equipped)

• Head-up display

- Activate or deactivate the Head Up

Display.

• Display Height

- Adjust the height of the HUD image on the windshield glass.

• Rotation

- Adjust the angle of the image.

• Brightness

- Adjust the intensity of the HUD illumination.

• Content Select

- Turn by Turn

- Traffic information

- Smart cruise control

- Lane keeping assist system or

Lane departure warning system

- Blind spot detection system

• Speedometer Size

- Choose the speedometer font size of the HUD. (Large, Medium,

Small)

• Speedometer Color

- Choose the speedometer font color of the HUD. (White, Orange,

Green)

3-66

2. Driving Assist

• Lane Keeping Assist System

- Lane Departure Warning/Standard

LKA/Active LKA

To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane

Keeping Assist System.

For more information, refer to the

"Lane Keeping Assist System" in chapter 5.

• Driver Attention Alert

To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver

Attention Alert (DAA).

- Off/Normal/Early


"Driver Attention Alert (DAA)" in chapter 5.

• Smart Cruise Control Speed

- Slow/Normal/Fast

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Smart Cruise Control system.


"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter 5.

• Assist Emergency Braking

To activate or deactivate the

Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB).


"Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB)" in chapter 5.

• Forward Collision Warning

- Late/Normal/Early

To adjust the initial warning alert time for Autonomous Emergency

Braking system.




• Rear Cross Traffic Alert

To activate or deactivate the Rear

Cross Traffic Alert system.


"Blind Spot Detection" in chapter 5.

• Blind Spot Detection Sound

To activate or deactivate the Blind

Spot Detection sound.


"Blind Spot Detection" in chapter

5.

3. Door

• Automatic Lock

- Disable: The auto door lock operation will be canceled.

- Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h

(9.3mph).

- Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R

(Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

3

3-67


• Automatic Unlock

- Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

- Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the

Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position. (if equipped with smart key)

- On Key Out: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch. (if equipped with remote key)

- On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.

- Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the driver’s door is opened.

• Smart Trunk

To activate or deactivate the Smart

Trunk system.

For more details, refer to "Smart

Trunk" in this chapter.

4. Lights

• One Touch Turn Signal

- Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.


"Light" in this chapter.

• Ambient Light

- Off : The ambient light of interior will turn off.

- To activate the brightness of ambient light from level 1 to level 4.

• Head Lamp Delay

To activate or deactivate the headlamp delay function.


"Light" in this chapter

• Welcome Light

To activate or deactivate the welcome light function.


"Light" in this chapter.

5. Sound

• Park Assist System Volume

- Softer/Louder

To adjust the Park Assist System volume.

• Welcome Sound

To activate or deactivate the welcome sound.

3-68

6. Convenience

• Seat Easy Access

- Off: The seat easy access function is deactivated.

- Normal/Extended: When you turn off the engine, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short

(Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.


"Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.

• Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/

Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you changed the mode.

• Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display.

• Mirror Auto Folding

If you select the mirror auto folding, it will be folded or unfolded when you lock or unlock doors by a key.


"Outside rearview mirror" in this chapter.

• Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.


"Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.

7. Service Interval

• Service Interval

To activate or deactivate the service interval function.

• Adjust Interval

If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.

i

Information

To use the service interval menu, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

3-69

3


Information

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

8. Other Features

• Fuel Economy Auto Reset

- Off: The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.

- After Ignition: The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the engine.

- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.


"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

• Fuel Economy Unit

To select the fuel economy unit.

(km/L, L/100, MPG)

• Temperature Unit

To select the temperature unit.

(°C,°F)

• Tire Pressure Unit

To select the tire pressure unit.

(psi, kPa, bar)

9. Reset

You can reset the menus in the User

Settings Mode. All menus in the User

Settings Mode are initialized, except language and service interval.

3-70

Warning messages (if equipped)

Shift to "P" position

(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

• This warning message illuminates if you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in P (Park) position.

• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop button once more, it will turn to the

ON position).

Low Key Battery

(for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates if the battery of the smart key is discharged when the Engine

Start/Stop button changes to the

OFF position.

Press start button while turning wheel (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the Engine

Start/Stop button is pressed.

• It means that you should press the

Engine Start/Stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

Press brake pedal to start engine


• This warning message illuminates if the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

• It means that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

Steering wheel not locked


• This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not lock when the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.

Key not in vehicle


• This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the Engine

Start/Stop button.

• It means that you always have the smart key with you.

Check steering wheel lock system (for smart key system)

• This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not lock normally when the Engine Start/Stop button changes to the OFF position.

Key not detected


• This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine Start/Stop button.

3

3-71


Press start button again


• This warning message illuminates if you can not operate the Engine

Start/Stop button when there is a problem with the Engine Start/Stop button system.

• It means that you could start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button once more.

• If the warning illuminates each time you press the Engine Start/Stop button, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Press “START” button with key


• This warning message illuminates if you press the Engine Start/Stop button while the warning message

“Key not detected” is illuminating.

• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

Check "BRAKE SWITCH" fuse


• This warning message illuminates if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.

• It means that you should replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine


• This warning message illuminates if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or

N (Neutral) position.

i

Information

You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

Door, Hood, Trunk Open

OIG046129

It means that any door, hood, or trunk is open.

CAUTION

Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/ hood/trunk is fully closed.

Also, check there is no door/ hood/trunk open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.

3-72

Sunroof Open (if equipped) Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"

• This warning message illuminates if the fuse switch located on the fuse box under the steering wheel is OFF.

• It means that you should turn the fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” in chapter 7.

Low Washer Fluid

• This warning message illuminates if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

• It means that you should refill the washer fluid.

OIG046130

This warning message illuminates if you turn off the engine when the sunroof is open.

Low Tire Pressure

This warning message illuminates if the tire pressure is low with the ignition switch or the Engine/Start Button in ON position.



(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Low Fuel

• This warning message illuminates if the fuel tank is nearly empty.

- When the low fuel level warning light is illuminates.

- When the trip computer displays

“--- km(or mile)” as distance to empty.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Engine has overheated

• This warning message illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is above 120°C (248°F). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer to “Overheating” in chapter 6.

3-73

3


Check headlight (if equipped)

This warning message illuminates if there is a malfunction (burned-out bulb except LED lamp or circuit malfunction) with the headlamp. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check headlamp LED

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the LED headlamp. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

• When replacing the bulb, use the same wattage bulb.


“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.

• If the different wattage bulb is equipped with the vehicle, this warning message is not displayed.

Check headlamp FAN

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with headlamp fan. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Take foot off accelerator pedal

(if equipped)

When the shift lever is in N (Neutral) position, if place the shift lever on D

(Drive) or R (Reverse) while depressing the accelerator, this message is displayed and warning sound is heard. And the engine power will be limited for safety. Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Check smart high beam system

(if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Smart

High Beam System. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


“Smart High Beam System” in chapter 3.

Check AEB system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a malfunction with the

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) system. We recommend that the vehicle be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.



(AEB) system" in chapter 5.

3-74

Check LDWS (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Lane

Departure Warning System (LDWS).

We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.


“Lane Departure Warning System

(LDWS)” in chapter 5.

Check BSD System (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Blind Spot

Detection (BSD) system. We recommend that the vehicle be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more information, refer to "Blind

Spot Detection (BSD) System" in chapter 5.

Attention Alert

Check System (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Driver

Attention Alert System. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


“Driver Attention Alert (DAA)” in chapter 5.

Check LKAS (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the Lane

Keeping Assist System (LKAS). We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


“Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS)” in chapter 5.

3

3-75


T RIIP OM PU TE

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

i

Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Trip modes

Fuel Economy

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Accumulated Info

• Tripmeter


• Elapsed Time

Drive Info

• Tripmeter


• Elapsed Time

Digital Speedometer

Smart Shift

3-76

■ T y p e A

T y p e B

OIG046460

To change the trip mode, toggle the

“ , ” switch on the steering wheel.

Fuel economy

OPDE046131

Average Fuel Economy (1)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.

• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average fuel economy after refueling, select the

"Auto Reset" mode in User Settings menu on the LCD display.

- After Ignition: The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning

OFF the engine.

- After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving speed exceeds 1 km/h, after adding 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel or more.

i

Information

The average fuel economy may be inaccurate, when the vehicle drives shorter than 300 meters (0.19 miles) after turning ON the Engine Start/Stop button.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the [OK] button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

• This mode displays the instant fuel economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).

Accumulated Info display

OPDE046133

This display shows the accumulated trip distance (1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is calculated starting from the last reset.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Accumulated driving info.

The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

3-77

3


The accumulated driving information will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

Driving Info display

i

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

To manually reset the information, press and hold the OK button when viewing the Driving info. The trip distance, the average fuel economy, and total driving time will reset simultaneously.

The driving information will continue to be counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

OPDE046135

This display shows the trip distance

(1), the average fuel economy (2), and the total driving time (3).

The information is calculated for each ignition cycle. The driving information data gets initialized, when it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the engine. In other words, the last driving information is available 4 hours after you have turned on the engine.

i

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since the last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

3-78

Digital Speedometer Smart Shift

OPDE046145

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (km/h, MPH).

OIG046196L

This display shows currently set the drive mode.


“Drive mode integrated control system” in chapter 5.

3

3-79


W AR NIIN AN D IIN

Warning lights

AT OR LIIG HT

Air bag Warning Light Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

i

Information

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with the SRS.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light



ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 2.

3-80

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7) . Then check all brake components for fluid leaks. If any leak on brake system is still found, the warning light remains on, or the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle towed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).


3-81

3


Electronic Brake force

Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally.


WARNING

Electronic Brake force

Distribution (EBD) System

Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.

(Continued)

(Continued)

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

We recommend you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

i

Information

- Electronic

Brake force Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, we recommend you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic Parking

Brake (EPB) Warning

Light (if equipped)

EPB



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the EPB.


i

Information

- Electronic

Parking Brake (EPB) Warning

Light

The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Warning Light may illuminate when the Electronic Stability control (ESC)

Indicator Light comes on to indicates that the ESC is not working properly

(This does not indicate malfunction of the EPB).

3-82

Electric Power

Steering (EPS)

Warning Light

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)



ON position.

- This indicator light comes on after the ignition key is turned to the

ON position and then goes out after approximately 3 seconds.

• When there is a malfunction with the EPS.




ON position.

- It remains on until the engine is started.

• When there is a malfunction with the emission control system.


NOTICE

- Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control systems which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.

NOTICE

- Gasoline Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

3

3-83


Charging System

Warning Light



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system:


2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the electrical charging system.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

3-84

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light



ON position.


• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:


2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7) .

If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

- Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

• If the engine does not stop immediately after the Engine Oil

Pressure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

• If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case,

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Low Fuel Level

Warning Light


When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty:

Add fuel as soon as possible.

NOTICE

- Low Fuel Level

Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below “0 or E” can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).


Warning Light

(if equipped)



ON position.


• When one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated (The location of the underinflated tires are displayed on the LCD display).




This warning light remains on after blinking for approximately 60 seconds or repeats blinking and off at the intervals of approximately 3 seconds:

When there is a malfunction with the

TPMS.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.




WARNING

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

3

3-85


Overspeed Warning


120 km/h

This warning light blinks:

• When you drive the vehicle more than 120 km/h.

- This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with overspeed.

- The overspeed warning chime also sound for approximately 5 seconds.

Master Warning Light

Indicator lights

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:


ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.


Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light



ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately

3 seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC system by selecting the “ESC OFF” item on the User Settings Mode in the cluster.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.


• When there is a malfunction on the

Blind Spot Detection (BSD), and so on.

To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

3-86

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (without smart key)

(if equipped)

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (With Smart Key)


When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in your key properly while the ignition switch is ON.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle properly while the Engine Start/Stop button is ACC or ON.

- At this time, you can start the engine.

- The indicator light goes off after starting the engine.


When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the vehicle.

- At this time, you can not start the engine.

This indicator light illuminates for

2 seconds and goes off:

• When the vehicle can not detect the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop button is ON.



• When the battery of the smart key is weak.

- At this time, you can not start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the

Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key.

(For more details, refer to “Starting the Engine” in section 5) .

• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


3

3-87


Turn Signal Indicator

Light

High Beam Indicator

Light

Rear Fog Indicator



• When you turn the turn signal light on.

If any of the following occurs, there may a malfunction with the turn signal system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- The indicator light does not blink but illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks more rapidly.

- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.


• When the headlights are on and in the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator

Light


• When the tail lights or headlights are on.

Low Beam Indicator



• When the rear fog lights are on.

Smart High Beam

Indicator Light

(if equipped)


• When the high-beam is on with the light switch in the AUTO light position.

• If your vehicle detects oncoming or preceding vehicles, the Smart High

Beam system will switch the high beam to low beam automatically.


• When the headlights are on.

3-88

LED Headlamp Warning


Cruise

Indicator Light

(if equipped)

■ Type A

CRUISE

■

Type B

AUTO HOLD Indicator


AUTO

HOLD


• When you turn the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.

• When there is a malfunction with the LED headlamp.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a

LED headlamp related part.

In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Continuous driving with the LED

Headlamp Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED headlamp life.


• When the cruise control system is enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator


SET


• [White] When you activate the auto hold system by pressing the AUTO

HOLD button.

• [Green] When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal with the auto hold system activated.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system.



• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “Auto

Hold” in chapter 5.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

3

3-89


SPORT Mode Indicator


SPORT

ECO Mode Indicator


This indicator light illuminates

• When you select "SPORT" mode as drive mode.


• When you select “ECO” mode as drive mode.

For more details, refer to "Drive

Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

For more details, refer to “Drive

Mode Integrated Control System” in chapter 5.

WARNING

Do not watch the ECO indicator light while driving. This will distract you and may cause an accident that results in severe personal injury.

Autonomous

Emergency Braking

(AEB) Warning light

(if equipped)


• When you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the AEB.





3-90

Lane Departure Warning

System (LDWS)

Indicator Light

(if equipped)


• [Green] When you activate the lane departure warning system.

• [White] When system operating conditions are not satisfied.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane departure warning system.


For more details, refer to "Lane

Departure Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.

Lane Keeping Assist

System (LKAS)

Indicator Light

(if equipped)


• [Green] When the system operating conditions are satisfied.

• [White] The system operating conditions are not satisfied.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane keeping assist system.

In this case, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "Lane

Keeping Assist System (LKAS)" in chapter 5.

Icy Road Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the outside temperature gauge is approximately below 4°C (39°F), the Icy

Road Warning Light and Outside

Temperature Gauge blinks and then illuminates. Also, the warning chime sounds 1 time.

i

Information

If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

3

3-91


H EA D U P D SP LA Y ((H UD

The head up display is a transparent display which projects a shadow of some information of the instrument cluster and navigation on the windshield glass.

F E QU PE

- An object is located above the head up display cover.

OIG046461

- The vehicle is driven on a wet road.

- Any improper lighting accessory is installed inside the vehicle, or there is incoming light from outside of the vehicle.

- The driver wears glasses.

- The driver wears contact lenses.

When it is difficult to read the head up display information, adjust the head up display angle or the head up display brightness level in the User

Settings Mode. For more information, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

WARNING

Precautions while using the head up display

It may be difficult to read information on the head up display in the following situations.

- The driver is improperly positioned in the driver’s seat.

- The diver wears polarizing-filter sunglasses.

• Do not tint the front windshield glass or add other types of metallic coating.

Otherwise, the head up display image may be invisible.

• Do not place any accessories on the crash pad or attach any objects on the windshield glass.

(Continued)

3-92

(Continued)

• The blind spot detection warnings on the head up display are mere supplemental.

Do not solely depend on them to change lanes. Always take a look around before changing lanes.

CAUTION

When replacing the front windshield glass of the vehicles equipped with the head up display, replace it with a windshield glass designed for the head up display operation.

Otherwise, duplicated images may be displayed on the windshield glass.

Head Up Display ON/OFF Head Up Display Information

NOTICE

If you select the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information as HUD contents, the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information will not be displayed on the LCD Display.

OIG046188L

To activate the head up display, select “Head-up Display” on the

“User Settings Mode” in the cluster.

If you do not select “Head-up

Display”, the head up display will be deactivated.

OIG047067L

1. Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information

2. Road signs

3. Speedometer

4. Cruise setting speed

5. Advanced Smart Cruise Control

(ASCC) information (if equipped)

6. Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS) information (if equipped)

7. Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system information (if equipped)

8. Audio/Video information

Head Up Display Setting

On the LCD display, you can change the head up display settings as follows.

• Head-Up Display

• Display Height

• Rotation

• Brightness

• Content Select

• Speedometer Size

• Speedometer Color

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

3

3-93


LIIG T

Exterior lights

Lighting control

OIG046469L

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) OFF (O) position

(2) AUTO light position (if equipped)

(3) Parking lamp position

(4) Headlamp position

OIG046411L

AUTO light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO position, the parking lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located on the instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the

AUTO light system may not work properly.

3-94

High beam operation

OIG046471L

Parking lamp position ( )

The parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

OIG046472L

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

i

Information

The ignition switch button must be in the ON position to turn on the headlamp.

OIG046470L

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

3-95

3


Smart high beam (if equipped)

OIG046473L

To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.

OPDE046057

The Smart High Beam is a system that automatically adjusts the headlamp range (switches between high beam and low beam) according to the brightness of other vehicles and road conditions.

Operating condition

1.Place the light switch in the AUTO position.

2.Turn on the high beam by pushing the lever away from you.

The smart high beam ( ) indicator will illuminate.

3.The Smart High Beam will turn on when vehicle speed is above

45km/h (25mph).

• If the lever is pushed away when the Smart High Beam is operating, the Smart High Beam will turn off and the high beam will be on continuously. The smart high beam ( ) indicator will turn off.

4.If the light switch is placed to the headlamp position, the Smart High

Beam will turn off and the low beam will be on continuously.

3-96

The high beam switches to low beam in the below conditions.

- When the Smart High Beam is off.

- When the light switch is not in the

AUTO position.

- When the headlamp is detected from the on-coming vehicle.

- When the tail lamp is detected from the front vehicle.

- When the surrounding is bright enough high beams are not needed.

- When streetlights or other lights are detected.

- When vehicle speed is below

35km/h (15mph).

Warning light and message

ODM046655L

When the Smart High Beam Assist

System is not working properly, the warning message will come on for a few second. After the message disappears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate.

We recommend that you take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

CAUTION

The system may not operate normally in the below conditions.

• When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc.

• When the lamp of the on-coming or front vehicle is covered with dust, snow or water.

• When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not detected because of exhaust fumes, smoke, fog, snow, etc.

• When the front window is covered with foreign matter such as ice, dust, fog, or is damaged.

(Continued)

3

3-97


(Continued)

• When there is a similar shaped lamp with the front vehicle’s lamps.

• When it is hard to see because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

• When the headlamp is not repaired or replaced at an authorized dealer.

• When headlamp aiming is not properly adjusted.

• When driving on a narrow winding road or rough road.

• When driving downhill or uphill.

• When only part of the vehicle in front is visible on a crossroad or on a corner.

• When there is a traffic light, reflecting sign, flashing sign or mirror.

• When the road conditions are bad such as being wet or covered with snow.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When the front vehicle’s headlamps are off but the fog lamps on.

• When a vehicle suddenly appears from a around a corner.

• When the vehicle is tilted from a flat tyre or being towed.

• When the LDWS (Lane Departure

Warning System) or LKAS (Lane

Keeping Assist System) warning light illuminates. (if equipped)

WARNING

• Do not place any accessories, stickers or tint the windshield.

• Have the windshield glass replaced by an authorized dealer.

• Do not remove or impact related parts of the Smart High

Beam system.

• Be careful that water doesn’t get into the Smart High Beam unit.

• Do not place objects on the instrument panel that reflect light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if sunlight is reflected.

• At times, the Smart High

Beam system may not work properly, always check the road conditions for your safety. When the system does not operate normally, manually change between the high beam and low beam.

3-98

Turn signals and lane change signals

OIG046474L

To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A). To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B).The

lever will return to the OFF position when released or when the turn is completed.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

One-touch turn signal function

(if equipped)

To activate an one-touch turn signal function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times.

You can activate/deactivate the One

Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings Mode on the

LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.

Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

OLF044195L

To turn on the rear fog lamp:

Position the light switch in the headlamp position, and then turn the light switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.

To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one of the following:

• Turn off the headlamp switch.

• Turn the light switch to the rear fog lamp position again.

• When the light switch is in the parking lamp position, if you turn off the front fog lamp, the rear fog lamp will also turn off.

3

3-99


Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lamp when the driver turns the engine off and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the engine is turned off, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlamp delay function

(if equipped)

If you place the ignition switch in to the ACC or OFF position with the headlamps ON, the headlamps

(and/or parking lamps) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, with the engine off if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the headlamps

(and/or parking lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlamps (and/or parking lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the smart key twice or turning the light switch to the

OFF or AUTO position. However, if you turn the light switch to the AUTO position when it is dark outside, the headlamps will not be turned off.


Headlamp Delay function from the

User Settings Mode on the LCD display.


"LCD Display" in this chapter.

NOTICE

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

3-100

Daytime running light (DRL)

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when:

1. The headlights or front fog lights are in the ON position.

2. The parking switch is in the ON position.

3. The engine is turned off.

Headlight leveling device

(if equipped)

OIG047406L

Manual type

To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch.

The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are the examples of proper switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.

Loading condition

Driver only

Driver + Front passenger

Full passengers (including driver)

Full passengers (including driver)

+ Maximum permissible loading

Driver + Maximum permissible loading

Switch position

0

0

1

2

3

3

3-101


Automatic type

It automatically adjusts the headlight beam level according to the number of passengers and loading weight in the luggage area.

And it offers proper headlight beam under various conditions.

WARNING

If it does not work properly even though your car is inclined backward according to passenger's posture, or the headlight beam is irradiated to the high or low position, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to inspect or replace the wiring yourself.

Welcome system (if equipped)

Welcome light (if equipped)

Also, if the outside rearview mirror folding switch is in the AUTO position, the outside rearview mirror will unfold automatically.

OIG046410

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is pressed on the remote key or smart key.

• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.

• When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

(if equipped)

Door handle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, the door handle lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.



• When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

3-102

Headlamp and Parking lamp

When the headlamp (lamp switch in the headlamp or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and trunk) are locked and closed, the parking lamp and headlamp will come on for 15 seconds if/or any of the below is performed.


At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the parking lamp and headlamp will turn off immediately.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.




Welcome Light from the User

Settings Mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately.

Interior lights

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is turned off or the battery will discharge.

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark.The interior lights may obscure your view and cause an accident.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the engine is turned off and the doors closed. If a door is opened, the lamp will go off 40 minutes after the engine is turned off. If the doors are locked by the smart key and the vehicle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.

3

3-103


Front lamps

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG046420

Front Door Lamp ( ):

The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened if the engine is running or not.

When doors are unlocked by the remote key or smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The front and rear room lamps go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC position or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

Rear lamps

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG046422

OIG046421

Front Map Lamp ( ):

Press either of these lens to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

3-104

Front Room Lamp ( ):

Press this button to turn the front and rear room lamps on and off.

OIG046423

Rear Room Lamp Switch ( ):

Press this button to turn the room lamp on and off.

NOTICE

Do not leave the lamp switches on for an extended period of time when the engine is turned off.

Trunk room lamp Door courtesy lamp Glove box lamp

OIG046424

The trunk room lamp comes on when the trunk is opened.

NOTICE

The trunk lamp comes on as long as the trunk lid is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the trunk lid securely after using the trunk.

OIG046425

The door courtesy lamp comes ON when the door is opened to assist entering or exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a warning to passing vehicles that the vehicle door is open.

When the ignition switch is in the

OFF or ACC position, the door courtesy lamp turns off after 20 minutes.

OIG046426

The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened.

If the glove box is not closed, the lamp will turn off after 20 minutes.

NOTICE

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after using the glove box.

3

3-105


Vanity mirror lamp

OLF044258

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light.

NOTICE

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the vanity mirror cover after using the mirror.

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

OIG046428

Welcome light

When all doors (and trunk) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for 15 seconds if the door is unlocked by the smart key or outside door handle button.

For more details, refer to "Welcome

System" in this chapter.

Escort light

When the ignition switch is in the

OFF position and the driver's door is opened, the puddle lamp will come on for 30 seconds. If the driver's door is closed within the 30 seconds, the puddle lamp will turn off after 15 seconds. If the driver's door is closed and locked, the puddle lamp will turn off immediately.

The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will turn on only the first time the driver's door is opened after the engine is turned off.

3-106

WIIP ER S A ND

■ Type A

■ Type B

AS HE S

ODH043370L

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST (V) – Single wipe

· OFF (O) – Off

· INT (---) – Intermittent wipe

· AUTO – Automatic control wipe

(if equipped)

· LO (1) – Low wiper speed

· HI (2) – High wiper speed

ODH043178

B : Auto control wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

MIST (V) : For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

OFF (O) : Wiper is not in operation.

INT (---) : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals.To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (B).

AUTO : The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wiper stops.To

vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (B).

3

3-107


LO (1) : The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI (2) : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

AUTO (Automatic) control

(if equipped)

i

Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

OIG046478L

The rain sensor (2) located on the upper end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval.

The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates.

When the rain stops, the wiper stops.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is in the ON position, the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to OFF position when the wiper is not in use.

3-108

WARNING

To avoid personal injury from the windshield wipers, when the engine is running and the windshield wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode:

• Do not touch the upper end of the windshield glass facing the rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of the windshield glass with a damp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the windshield glass.

NOTICE

• When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the OFF (O) position to stop the auto wiper operation. The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the vehicle.

• Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

Windshield washers

OLF044095

In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windshield using the defroster to prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

3

3-109


CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

3-110

D RIIV R A SIIS T S TE M

Rear view camera

(if equipped)

OIG046404

Whenever the vehicle ignition is cycled off and on, the rear view camera will turn on when the shift lever is put into R (Reverse).

This is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the navigation display while backing-up.

WARNING

The rear camera display is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the rear camera display when backingup.

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

i

Information

Always keep the camera lens clean.

The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with foreign material.

OIG046405

The Rear View Camera will activate when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

3

3-111


Rear parking assist system

(if equipped)

OIG046401

The Rear Parking Assist System aids the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within the distance of about 120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. This is a supplemental system that senses objects within the range and location of the sensors (1), it cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed.

i

Information

The system may not recognize objects less than 30 cm (12 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance.

NOTICE

Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.


• Be aware that some objects may not be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.

3-112

Operation of the rear parking assist system

OIG046402L

Operation condition

• This system will activate when the indicator on the rear parking assist

OFF button is not illuminated.

If you desire to deactivate the rear parking assist system, press the rear parking assist OFF button again. (The indicator on the button will illuminate.)

To turn the system on, press the button again. (The indicator on the button will go off.)

• This system will activate when backing up with the engine running.

• Sensing distance when backing up is approximately 120 cm (47 in.) when you are driving less than 10 km/h (6 mph).

• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.

Types of warning indicator and sound

Distance from object

Warning indicator

Warning sound

120cm ~ 61cm

(47 in. ~ 24 in.)

Buzzer beeps intermittently.

60cm ~ 31cm

(24 in. ~ 12 in.)

Buzzer beeps more frequently.

Less than

30 cm (12 in.)

Buzzer sounds continuously.

i

Information

• If an object is in between sensors or close to a sensor, the displayed indicator may differ from the above illustration.

• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.

3

3-113


•

When you shift into the R (Reverse) position and one or more of the below situation occurs, this may indicate a malfunction with the parking assist system.

• You don't hear an audible warning sound or the buzzer sounds intermittently.

is displayed. (if equipped)

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Non-operational conditions of rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may not operate normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• The sensor is covered or stained with foreign material, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of a parking assist system malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is present.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are present near the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or accessories have been installed, or if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified.

• Trailer towing.

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than about 1 m (40 in.) and narrower than about 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist system malfunction. Always drive safely and cautiously.

3-114

Parking Assist System

(if equipped)

■ Front

■ Rear

Sensors

OIG046400

This system is a supplemental system that senses objects within the range and location of the sensors, it cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed.

WARNING

• ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are not any objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.


• Be aware that some objects may not be visible on the screen or be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.

Sensor

OIG046401

The Parking Assist System assists the driver during movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within the distance of 100 cm

(39 inches) in front and 120 cm (47 inches) behind the vehicle.

Operation of the Parking Assist

System

OIG046481L

Operating condition

• This system will activate when the

Parking Assist System button is pressed with the engine running.

• The Parking Assist System button turns on automatically and activates the Parking Assist System when you move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) position. However, if vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h, the system will not warn you even though objects are detected, and if vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h, the system will turn off automatically. To turn on the system, press the Parking Assist

System button.

3-115

3


• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound and indicator

Distance from object

100cm~61cm Front

Warning indicator

When driving forward

When driving rearward

-

Warning sound

120cm~61cm Rear

60cm~31cm

30cm

Front

Rear

Front

Rear -

-

-

Buzzer beeps intermittently

Buzzer beeps intermittently

Buzzer beeps frequently

Buzzer beeps frequently

Buzzer sounds continuously

Buzzer sounds continuously

NOTICE

• The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction with the Parking Assist System. If this occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

3-116

Non-operational conditions of

Parking Assist System

Parking Assist System may not operate normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• Sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked.

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

1 m and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.

There is a possibility of Parking

Assist System malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is present.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are present near the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or accessories have been installed, or if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.

i

Information

Sensor may not recognize objects less than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance.

NOTICE

Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants related to a

Parking Assist System. Always drive safely and cautiously.

3

3-117


Around View Monitoring (AVM)

System

OIG046463L

The Around View Monitoring (AVM)

System can assist in parking by allowing the driver to see around the vehicle. Push the button into the ON position to operate the system. To cancel the system, push the button again.

3-118

Operating conditions

- When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position

- When the transmission is on D, N or R

- When vehicle speed is not over

15km/h

CAUTION

(1) Front camera

(2) Left/Right camera

(3) Rear camera

ODH047435

• Around View Monitoring (AVM)

System only serves to assist the driver in parking. ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle.

• Always keep the camera lens clean. The camera may not work normally if the lens is covered with foreign material.

NOTICE

• When vehicle speed is over

15km/h, the AVM system will turn off. The system will not automatically turn on again, even though vehicle speed gets below 15 km/h. Push the AVM button again, to turn on the system.

• When the vehicle is backing up, the AVM system will turn ON regardless of vehicle speed or

AVM button status. However, if vehicle speed is over 15 km/h when driving forward, the AVM system will turn off.

• A warning appears on the AVM system when:

- The trunk is opened

- The driver's door is opened

- The passenger's door is opened

- The outside rearview mirror is folded

• If the AVM system is not operating normally, the system should be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, please refer to the

Multimedia System Manual that was supplied with your vehicle.

D EF OS R

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

i

Information

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to “Windshield

Defrosting and Defogging” in this chapter.

Rear window defroster

■ Manual climate control system

■ Automatic climate control system

• Type A • Type B

OIG046305

• To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

• To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

i

Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position.

OIG046306

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, while engine is running.

Outside mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

3

3-119


M AN AL

Type A

LIIM AT E C ON RO L S ST EM F E QU PE

Type B

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Temperature control knob

3. Front windshield defroster button

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Mode selection buttons

6. Air intake control button

7. A/C (Air conditioning) button

8. Max A/C selection button

NOTICE

Operating the blower when the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running.

OIG046300/OIG046345

3-120

Type C

Type D

1. Fan speed control knob

2. Temperature control knob

3. Front windshield defroster button

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Mode selection buttons


7. A/C (Air conditioning) button

8. Max A/C selection button

NOTICE

Operating the blower when the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running.

3

OIG046301/OIG046302

3-121


Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

3-122

(if equipped) (if equipped)

OIG046309

Mode selection

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Floor/Defrost-Level

(A, C, E, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

3

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)

Defrost-Level (A, D)

OIG046307

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face,

Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and

Defrost air position.

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

3-123


■ Front

Temperature control

OIG047311L

■ Rear

OIG046310

MAX A/C-Level (B, D, F)

To operate the MAX A/C, push the

MAX A/C selection button.

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

OIG046312

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

OIG046313

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air.

3-124

Air intake control

■ Type A, B

■ Type C, D

OIG046314

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

■ Type A, B

■ Type C, D

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i

Information

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) will cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

3

OIG046315

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

3-125


WARNING

• Continuous operation of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

• Continuous operation of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Fan speed control Air conditioning (A/C)

OIG046316

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the “0” position turns off the fan.

OIG046317

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

3-126

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.




Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

3

3-127


Information

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

3-128

System maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator core

Heater core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING

We recommend that the air conditioning system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing the service.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

3-129

3


WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.


Air conditioning refrigerant label

■ Example

• Type A

• Type B

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below:

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

ODH044365R

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located on the air intake duct.

Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

ODH043366

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

3-130

A UT OM AT C C LIIM TE ON RO L S YS EM

Type A

F E QU PE

Type B

1. Driver’s temperature control knob

2. Passenger’s temperature control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Fan speed control button

6. Air conditioning button

7. Climate information screen selection button

8. SYNC button

9. Front windshield defrost button

10. Rear window defrost button

11. Mode selection button


NOTICE

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running.

3

OIG046303/OIG046346

3-131


Type C

Type D

3-132

1. Driver’s temperature control knob

2. Passenger’s temperature control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Fan speed control button

6. Air conditioning button

7. Climate information screen selection button

8. SYNC button

9. Front windshield defrost button

10. Rear window defrost button

11. Mode selection button


NOTICE

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running.

OIG046304/OIG046347

Automatic heating and air conditioning

■ Type A, D

■ Type A, D

■ Type B, C

OIG046318

■ Type B, C

OIG046320 i

Information

• To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

• For your convenience, use the

AUTO button and set the temperature to 23°C (73°F).

3

OIG046319

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically according to the temperature setting.

OIG046321

2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

3-133


OIG046340 i

Information

Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1.Start the engine.

2.Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3.Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4.Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5.Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6.If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

3-134

Mode selection

OIG046309

OIG046322

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

3

3-135


■ Type A, D

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

■ Type B, C

OIG046323

■ Front

■ Rear

OIG047311L

Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

OIG046324

Defrost-Level (A)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

3-136

OIG046312

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left

(Rear : down) to the maximum position. To open the vent, rotate it right

(Rear : up) to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

■ Type A, D

■ Type B, C

■ Type A, D

OIG046320

■ Type B, C

• Turn the driver side temperature control knob. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted equally.

OIG046325

Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually

• Press the “SYNC” button again to adjust the driver and passenger side temperature individually. The illumination of button turns off.

• Operate the driver side temperature control knob to adjust the driver side temperature.

• Operate the passenger side temperature control knob to adjust the passenger side temperature.

3

OIG046321

Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

OIG046326

Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally

• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust the driver and passenger side temperature equally.

The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side temperature.

3-137


Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.

This is a normal condition. You can switch the temperature mode between

Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;

- Automatic climate control system

While pressing the OFF button, press the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more. The display will change from Centigrade to

Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to

Centigrade.

- “User setting mode” in the cluster :

You can change the temperature unit in the “Other features -

Temperature unit”

Air intake control

■ Type A, D

■ Type B, C

OIG046328

This is used to select the outside

(fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

OIG046327

Outside (fresh) air position

■ Type A, D

■ Type B, C

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

3-138

i

Information

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Fan speed control

OIG046329

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pushing the fan speed control button.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

3

3-139


Air conditioning OFF mode Climate information screen selection (if equipped)

OIG046343

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OIG046331

Push the OFF button of the front to turn off the air climate control system.

However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

OIG046333

If you push the climate information screen selection button, the climate information displays in the AVN screen.

3-140

System operation

Ventilation





Heating





5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.


3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

NOTICE

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.

• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.

• The air conditioning evaporator

(cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

3-141

3


Information

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• Use air conditioning to reduce humidity and moisture inside the vehicle on rainy or humid days.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

3-142

System maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower


Evaporator core

Heater core

1LDA5047

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.


3

3-143


WARNING

Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.


Air conditioning refrigerant label

■ Example

• Type A

• Type B

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below:

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

ODH044365R

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located on the air intake duct.

Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

We recommend the air conditioning system be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

ODH043366

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

3-144

WIIN DS HIIE LD EF OS TIIN G A

WARNING

Windshield heating

Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to lower speed.

D D EF GG

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG046336

1. Select any fan speed except “0” position.

2. Select desired temperature.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air conditioning (if equipped) will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the position.

If the air conditioning and outside

(fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

3

3-145


To defrost outside windshield Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windshield

■ Type A

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG046337

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning (if equipped) will be selected automatically.

■ Type B

OIG046335

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

3-146

To defrost outside windshield

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG046338

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.


4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

Defogging logic (if equipped)

To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.


3. Press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 10 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.


3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The climate control information screen will blink 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

3

3-147


Auto defogging system

(only for automatic climate control system, if equipped)

i

Information

The auto defogging system may not operate normally, when the outside temperature is below -10 °C.

3-148

When the Auto Defogging

System operates, the indicator will illuminate.

OIG046479L

(1) Auto defogging sensor

Auto defogging reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.

If higher level of moisture are sensed in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging

System will operate in the following order:

Step 1 : Outside air position

Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 3 : Blowing air toward the windshield

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the windshield

If the air conditioning is off or recirculated air position is manually selected while Auto Defogging System is ON, the Auto Defogging System Indicator will blink 3 times to signal that the manual operation has been canceled.

To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging

System

Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink

3 times and the ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal.

i

Information

• When the air conditioning is turned on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air conditioning, the indicator will blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.

• For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position while Auto defogging system is operating.

NOTICE

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the driver side windshield glass.

Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

C LIIM TE ON RO L A DD TIIO NA

Cluster ionizer (if equipped)

FE AT UR S

Sunroof inside air recirculation

(if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the clean air function turns on automatically.

Also, the clean air function turns off automatically, when the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

If the sunroof opens while the heater or Air Conditioning system operates, the outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically for ventilating the car. Then, if you select the recirculated air position, the outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically after 3 minutes.

If you close the sunroof, the intake mode will be changed to the previous selected mode.

Automatic ventilation

(if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the engine is running and the outside temperature is low, the automatic ventilation feature will activate if the recirculated air intake position is selected for more than 30 minutes while A/C is on. In this condition, the air intake position will automatically switch to the outside (fresh) air position.

To cancel or set the Automatic

Ventilation

When the air conditioning system is on, select Face Level mode and press the recirculated air position button for three seconds.

When the automatic ventilation is set, the air intake control button (recirculated air position) indicator will blink 6 times. When canceled, the air intake control button (recirculated air position) indicator will blink 3 times.

3

3-149


S TO AG E C OM AR TM EN

WARNING

Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

NOTICE

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Center console storage

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

To open :

Pull the lever.

OIG046429

3-150

Glove box Sunglass holder

OIG046431

The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key (1).

To open:

Pull the lever (2).

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box door after use.

An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.

OIG046432

To open:

Press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is closed while driving.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

3-151

3


Cellular phone holder

To open:

Push the cover.

WARNING

OIG046433

Items other than a cellular phone may not fit inside the cellular phone storage in accordance with its size or shape. Do not forcefully push items into the cellular phone storage and close the cover. It may damage or distort those items. In addition, do not forcefully open the cellular phone storage cover, when it is jammed with a stored item inside.

3-152

Wireless cellular phone charging system (if equipped)

OIG046434

There is wireless cellular phone charging system inside the front console. It is available when all doors are closed, and when the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ACC/ON position.

To charge a cellular phone

The wireless cellular phone charging systems charge only the Qi-enabled cellular phones ( ).

Read the label on the cellular phone accessory cover or visit your cellular phone manufacturer’s website to check whether your cellular phone supports the Qi technology.

• The wireless charging process starts when you put a Qi-enabled cellular phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the smart key, from the wireless charging unit. If not, the wireless charging process may be interrupted.

2. The indicator illuminates in orange during the charging process. The indicator color changes to green, when the charging process is completed.

3. You can turn ON or OFF the wireless charging function in the user settings mode on the instrument cluster. (For further information, refer to the “LCD

Modes” in this chapter.)

Slightly change the cellular phone position, when the cellular phone is not being charged. Make sure that the indicator illuminates in orange.

The indicator color may not change to green in accordance with the cellular phone type, even though the charging process is completed. The indicator blinks in orange for 10 seconds when there is a malfunction with the wireless charging system. In this case, temporarily stop the charging process, and re-attempt to wirelessly charge your cellular phone again.

The system warns you with a message on the LCD display when you do not take out the cellular phone from the wireless charging unit with the door open and the Engine

Start/Stop button in the OFF position.

WARNING

• The wireless cellular phone charging system may not support certain cellular phones, which are not verified for the

Qi specification ( ).

• Locate your cell phone well in the middle of the wireless cellular phone charging system.

Even when your cell phone locates slightly to one side, the charging speed may decrease.

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when a smart key function operates

(i.e. starting the engine, opening the doors, closing the doors).

• For certain cell phones, the indicator color may not change to green, even when the wireless charging process is properly completed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when temperature abnormally increases inside the wireless cellular phone charging system. The wireless charging process restarts, when temperature falls to a proper level.

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop when there is any metallic item, such as a coin, between the wireless cellular phone charging system and a cellular phone.

3

3-153


IIN TE RIIO R F EA UR S

Ashtray (if equipped) Cup holder

Front

■ Front

Rear

■ Rear

• Type A

OIG046475L

OIG046477L

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean the ashtray:

The plastic receptacle should be removed by lifting the plastic ashtray receptacle upward after turning the cover counterclockwise and pulling it out.

WARNING

Ashtray use

Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

3-154

To open the cover:

Push the cover.

OIG046435

• Type B

OIG046436

To open the cover:

Pull the armrest down to use the cup holders.

WARNING

• Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

• Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid while the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of sudden stop or collision.

• Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.

Sunvisor

NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

OIG046437

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (4) as needed. Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets.

i

Information

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

3

3-155


WARNING

For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvisor.

Power outlet (if equipped)

■ Front

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.

NOTICE

• Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.

• Avoid putting a plastic card such as a credit card in the ticket holder located in the outside of the sunvisor. This could cause damage to the plastic card.

■ Rear

OIG046438

OIG046439

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180

W(Watt) with the engine running.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180

W(Watt) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

(Continued)

3-156

(Continued)

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.

• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and cause system malfunction.

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

OIG046476L

To use the cigarette lighter, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

Push the cigarette lighter all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

We recommend that you use parts for replacement from an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.

• Do not insert foreign objects into the socket of the cigarette lighter. It may damage the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter should be used in the cigarette lighter socket. The use of plug-in accessories (shavers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.

3

3-157


Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driving.You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

■ Type A

OIG046442

WARNING

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothe pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

■ Type B

OIG046441

You can set the clock by using the

AVN (Audio, Video, Navigation)

For more details, please refer to the

Multimedia System Manual that was supplied with your vehicle.

OIG046443

To hang items, pull the hanger down.

(Type A)

These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.

3-158

Floor mat anchor(s)

(if equipped)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.

WARNING

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

(Continued)

(Continued)

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that the

HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Rear curtain (if equipped)

OIG046480L

OIG046445

To raise and lower the rear curtain, press the button.

The rear curtain will be lowered automatically when you shift the shift lever into R (Reverse) and raised automatically when you shift the shift lever from R (Reverse) into P (Park).

3-159

3


After the rear curtain is lowered by shifting into R (Reverse), if you drive more than 20 km/h (12 mph) with the shift lever in D (Drive), the rear curtain will be raised automatically.

Side curtain (if equipped)

NOTICE

Do not apply excessive force while operating the rear curtain.

This could cause damage to the rear curtain.

OIG046446

To use the side curtain:

1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).

2. Hang the curtain on both sides of the hook.

NOTICE

• Always hang both sides of the curtain on the hook. This could cause damage to the side curtain if only one side of the curtain is hooked.

• Do not let any foreign material get in between the vehicle and side curtain. The side curtain may not be lifted up.

3-160

Multimedia System

Multimedia system .................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod ® port ...............................................4-2

Antenna ...............................................................................4-3

Steering wheel audio control ........................................4-4

Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) ..................4-5

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology hands-free............4-5

4

Multimedia System

M UL TIIM ED SY ST M i

Information

• If you install an aftermarket HID headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and electronic device may malfunction.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

AUX, USB and iPod

®

port

OIG046452

You can use an AUX port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also in an iPod ® port.

i

Information

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-2

Antenna

OIG046448

Shark fin antenna (1)

The shark fin antenna will receive the transmit data.

(for example : GPS signal)

NOTICE

• Do not clean the inside of the rear window glass with a cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits as this may cause damage to the antenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coatings such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These can degrade the receiving AM and FM broadcast signals.

NOTICE

• To prevent damage to the rear glass antenna, never use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the window. Clean the inside surface of the rear glass window with a piece of soft cloth.

• When putting a sticker on the inside surface of the rear window, be careful not to damage to the rear glass antenna.

• Do not put sharp instruments nearby the rear glass antenna.

• Tinted rear window may affect the proper functioning of the antenna.

Glass antenna (2)

Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to receive both AM and FM signals.

4

4-3

Multimedia System

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

■ Type A

■

Type B

OIG046449

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Move the VOLUME lever up to increase volume.

• Move the VOLUME lever down to decrease volume.

MODE ( ) (3)

Press the MODE button to select

Radio, Disc, or AUX.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved up or down and held for 0.8 second or more, it will function in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

MUTE ( ) (4, if equipped)

• Press the button to mute the sound.

• Press the button again to activate the sound.

i

Information

Detailed information for the audio control buttons are described in a separately supplied manual.

OIG046449L

The steering wheel audio control button is installed for your convenience.

NOTICE

Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

4-4

If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved up or down, it will function in the following modes.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION UP/DOWN button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN button.

Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) (if equipped)

Detailed information for the AVN system is described in a separately supplied manual.

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology hands-free (if equipped)

(1) Call / Answer button

(2) Call end button

(3) Microphone

• For detailed information, refer to audio manual supplied separately.

• AVN : Detailed information for the

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology hands-free is described in the manual supplied separately.

OIG046453

4

OIG046454

You can use the phone wirelessly by using the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

4-5

Driving your vehicle

Before Driving ........................................................5-4

Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4

Before starting...................................................................5-4

Ignition Switch........................................................5-6

Key ignition switch............................................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop button................................................5-9

Automatic Transmission ......................................5-14

Automatic transmission operation ..............................5-14

Parking...............................................................................5-18

Good driving practices ...................................................5-19

Braking System ....................................................5-21

Power brakes ...................................................................5-21

Disc brakes wear indicator ...........................................5-22

Parking brake (foot type) .............................................5-22

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-24

AUTO HOLD ......................................................................5-29

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-33

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-35

Vehicle Stability Management......................................5-38

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-40

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-40

Good braking practices..................................................5-41

Drive Mode Integrated Control System ............5-42

ECO mode..........................................................................5-43

SPORT mode.....................................................................5-44

SMART mode....................................................................5-44

Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-48

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-49

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-52

Limitations of the system .............................................5-55

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)...........5-56

System setting and activation......................................5-56

AEB warning message and system control..............5-58

AEB sensor .......................................................................5-60

System malfunction........................................................5-62


Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)........5-68

LDWS operation...............................................................5-69

Warning light and message ..........................................5-70


Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).................5-73

LKAS operation................................................................5-74

Warning light and message ..........................................5-78

Limitations of the System.............................................5-79

LKAS function change ...................................................5-80

5

5

Driver Attention Alert System (DAA)................5-81

System setting and activation......................................5-81

Resetting the system .....................................................5-82

System standby ...............................................................5-83

System malfunction........................................................5-83

Cruise Control.......................................................5-85

Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-85

Advanced Smart Cruise Control System...........5-90

Smart Cruise Control speed..........................................5-92

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance .............................................................................5-96

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.....5-99

To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise

Control .............................................................................5-101

To convert to Cruise Control mode ..........................5-101

Limitations of the system ...........................................5-102

Special Driving Conditions ................................5-106

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-106

Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-106

Smooth cornering .........................................................5-107

Driving at night..............................................................5-107

Driving in the rain .........................................................5-107

Driving in flooded areas..............................................5-108

Highway driving.............................................................5-108

Reducing the risk of a rollover .................................5-109

Winter Driving ....................................................5-110

Snow or icy conditions ................................................5-110

Winter Precautions.......................................................5-112

Vehicle Weight....................................................5-115

Overloading ....................................................................5-115

Trailer Towing.....................................................5-116

WARNING

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the trunk open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

5-3

5


B EF RE RIIV G

Before entering the vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Before starting

• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and the doors are securely closed and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and make mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.

• Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.

5-4

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERI-

OUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each additional drink.

Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

(Continued)

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.

5-5

5


IIG NIIT N S TC

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.

• NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the ignition switch, or any other control, while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Key ignition switch

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

OAE056172L

Whenever the front door is opened, the ignition switch will illuminate, provided the ignition switch is not in the

ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed. (if equipped)

(Continued)

This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and turn ignition switch to the

LOCK position.

Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

NOTICE

Never use aftermarket key whole covers. This may generate start-up failure due to communication failure.

WARNING

• NEVER turn the ignition switch to the LOCK or ACC position while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency.

(Continued)

5-6

Key ignition switch positions

Switch

Position

LOCK

Action

The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.

(if equipped)

Notes

ACC

Some electrical accessories are usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release tension.

ON

START

This is the normal key position when the engine has started.

All features and accessories are usable.

The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition switch from ACC to ON.

To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position.

The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.

Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

The engine will crank until you release the key.

5

5-7


Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake pedal.

• Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake padel is released when the rpm is high.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.


(Park).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the engine starts and release it.

i

Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine while warming it up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in the START position for more than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10 seconds before trying again.

• Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position with the engine running. It may damage the starter.

• If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

5-8

Engine Start/Stop button

OIG056001

Whenever the front door is opened, the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed. (if equipped)

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an emergency:

Press and hold the Engine

Start/Stop button for more than two seconds OR Rapidly press and release the Engine

Start/Stop button three times

(within three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the

N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

• NEVER press the Engine

Start/ Stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems.

This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

• Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the Engine Start/

Stop button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

5

5-9


Engine Stop/Start button positions

Button Position

OFF

Action Notes

To turn off the engine, press the Engine

Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine Start/Stop button without the shift lever in P (Park), the

Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft. (if equipped)

If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound.

ACC Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

Some electrical accessories are usable.

The steering wheel unlocks.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent the battery from discharging.

If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left to release tension.

5-10

Button Position

ON

Action

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started.

Notes

Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position when the engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.

START

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the Engine Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N

(Neutral) position.

For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as follows:

OFF → ACC → ON → OFF or ACC

5

5-11


Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake pedal.

• Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal is released when the rpm is high.

i

Information

• The engine will start by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from the driver, the engine may not start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " " indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on, and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when using the ACC position or if the vehicle engine is ON.

1. Always carry the smart key with you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.


(Park).


5 Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

i

Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine while warming it up.

5-12

■ Smart key

■ Card key (if equipped)

OIG057008L

OIG056009 i

Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.

5-13

5


A UT OM AT TR AN MIIS SIIO N

Manual shift mode

5-14

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.

Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.

The shift lever can freely operate.

OIG056013

Automatic transmission operation

The automatic transmission has six

(or eight) forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, then set the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

Transmission ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

• After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the shift lever is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the engine off.

• When parking on an incline, block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from rolling down.

• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must depress firmly on the brake pedal and make sure your foot is off the accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and still cannot shift the lever out of

P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in this chapter.

The shift lever must be in P (Park) before turning the engine off.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.

5-15

5


N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop with the engine ON. Shift into

P (Park) if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N

(Neutral) to another gear.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically shift through a 6 (or 8)-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill, depress the accelerator fully. The transmission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear (or gears, as appropriate).

WARNING

Do not shift into gear unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shifting into gear when the engine is running at high speed can cause the vehicle to move very rapidly. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit people or objects.

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

OIG056014

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, manual shift mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

5-16

In manual shift mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions.

+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

i

Information

• Only the six (or eight) forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.

• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transmission will upshift automatically.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the driver presses the lever to

+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the transmission may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range. The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine rpms below the red zone.

• When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the

+ (Up) position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the - (Down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the automatic transmission has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

5

5-17


Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R

(Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, and then do the following:

5. Move the shift lever while holding down the screwdriver.

6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock release access hole then install the cap.

7. Depress the brake pedal, and then restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift-lock release, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer immediately.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key with you when exiting the vehicle.

OIG056015L

1. Place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock access hole.

4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screwdriver) into the access hole and press down on the tool.

Ignition key interlock system

(if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

WARNING

When you stay in the vehicle with the engine running, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. The engine or exhaust system may overheat and start a fire.

The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot.

Keep away from the exhaust system components.

Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry grass, paper or leaves. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-18

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident because of a loss of engine braking and the transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

• When driving in manual shift mode, slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged if the engine rpms are outside of the allowable range.

• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.

(Continued)

5-19

5


(Continued)

• In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

i

Information

- Kickdown

Mechanism (if equipped)

Use the kickdown mechanism for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission will shift to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

5-20

B RA KIIN G S ST M

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work.

You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Applying the brakes continuously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

5

5-21


Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

Parking brake

(foot type, if equipped)

Applying the parking brake

Always set the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.

NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

i

Information

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

OIG056019

To apply the parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

5-22

Releasing the parking brake

OIG056020

To release the parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal down and it will release automatically.

If the parking brake does not release or does not release all the way, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into P

(Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking brake not fully engaged are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

• Only release the parking brake when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator pedal while the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the parking brake engaged, warning will sound. Damage to the parking brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the parking brake is released and the Brake Warning Light is off before driving.

5

5-23


Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light by placing the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine).

This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light remains on after the parking brake is released while engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location.

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

(if equipped)

Applying the parking brake

OIG056017

To apply the EPB

(Electronic Parking Brake):

1. Pull up the EPB switch.

Make sure the Parking Brake

Warning Light comes on.

2. EPB can be used in emergency situation instead of brake function when brake system is not working properly.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the EPB while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

5-24

Releasing the parking brake

OIG057018L

To release the EPB (Electronic

Parking Brake), press the EPB switch in the following condition:

• Place the Engine Start/Stop button in the ON position.

• Depress the brake pedal.


Warning Light goes off.

To release EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) automatically:

• Shift lever in P (Park)

With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of P

(Park) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).

• Shift lever in N (Neutral)

With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of N

(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).

• Satisfy the following conditions

1. Start the engine.

2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.

3. Close the driver's door, engine hood and trunk.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal while the shift lever is in R (Rear),

D (Drive) or manual shift mode.


Warning light goes off.

i

Information

• For your safety, you can engage the

EPB even though the Engine Stop/

Start button is in the OFF position, but you cannot release it.

• For your safety, depress the brake pedal and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch when you drive downhill or when backing up the vehicle.

NOTICE

• If the parking brake warning light is still on even though the

EPB has been released, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not drive your vehicle with the EPB applied. It may cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

5

5-25


EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) may be automatically applied when:

• Requested by other systems

• If the driver turns the engine off while Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically applied.

Warning messages

OAEE056115L

To release EPB, fasten seatbelt, close door, hood and trunk

• If you try to drive with the EPB applied, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

• If the driver's seat belt is unfastened and the engine hood or trunk is opened, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a message may appear.

If the situation occurs, depress the brake pedal and release EPB by pressing the EPB switch.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P

(Park) position, press the EPB switch, and press the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF position. Take the Smart Key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Vehicles not fully engaged in

P (Park) with the parking brake set are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the EPB switch. If the

EPB is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

• Only release the EPB when you are seated inside the vehicle with your foot firmly on the brake pedal.

5-26

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator pedal while the parking brake is engaged. If you depress the accelerator pedal with the EPB engaged, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

Damage to the parking brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear or damage to brake parts. Make sure the EPB is released and the

Parking Brake Warning Light is off before driving.

■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B

OTLE055028/OLFH044408L

AUTO HOLD deactivating.

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OLF054131N/OLF044411N

Parking brake automatically locked

If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is activated, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

i

Information

• A clicking sound may be heard while operating or releasing the

EPB. These conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is functioning properly.

• When leaving your keys with a parking attendant or assistant, make sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB.

5

5-27


EPB malfunction indicator

(if equipped)


The EPB malfunction indicator may illuminate when the ESC indicator comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

Emergency braking

If there is a problem with the brake pedal while driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and holding the EPB switch. Braking is possible only while you are holding the EPB switch. However, braking distance will be longer than normal.

OIG056103/OIG056104

This warning light illuminates if the

Engine Start/Stop button is changed to the ON position and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.

If the EPB malfunction indicator remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the

Engine Start/Stop button is changed to the ON position, this indicates that the EPB may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

• If the EPB warning light is still on, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the parking brake warning light does not illuminate or blinks even though the EPB switch was pulled up, the EPB may not be applied.

• If the parking brake warning light blinks when the EPB warning light is on, press the switch, and then pull it up. Repeat this one more time. If the EPB warning does not go off, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

WARNING

Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to a severe accident.

Information

During emergency braking, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the system is operating.

5-28

NOTICE

If you continuously notice a noise or burning smell when the EPB is used for emergency braking, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

AUTO HOLD (if equipped)

The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a standstill even though the brake pedal is not depressed after the driver brings the vehicle to a complete stop by depressing the brake pedal.

W h ii tt e

G rr e e n

To apply :

When the EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) does not release

If the EPB does not release normally, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked.

W h ii ii tt e

OIG056030

1. With the driver's door, engine hood and trunk closed, fasten the driver's seat belt or depress the brake pedal and then press the

[AUTO HOLD] switch. The white

AUTO HOLD indicator will come on and the system will be in the standby position.

OIG057031L

2. When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal, the Auto Hold maintains the brake pressure to hold the vehicle stationary. The indicator changes from white to green.

3. The vehicle will remain stationary even if you release the brake pedal.

4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be released.

5-29

5


To release :

• If you press the accelerator pedal with the shift lever in D (Drive), R

(Reverse) or manual shift mode, the Auto Hold will be released automatically and the vehicle will start to move. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white.

• If the vehicle is restarted using the cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while Auto Hold and cruise control is operating, the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation. The

AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white. (if equipped with cruise control system)

To cancel :

L ii ii g h tt tt o ff ff ff

OIG056032


2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.

The AUTO HOLD indicator will turn off.

WARNING

When the AUTO HOLD is automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal, always take a look around your vehicle.

Slowly depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

WARNING

To prevent, unexpected and sudden vehicle movement, ALWAYS press your foot on the brake pedal to cancel the Auto Hold before you:

- Drive downhill.

- Drive the vehicle in R (Reverse).

- Park the vehicle.

5-30

i

Information

• The Auto Hold does not operate when:

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The engine hood is opened

- The shift lever is in P (Park) or R

(Reverse)

- The EPB is applied

• For your safety, the Auto Hold automatically switches to EPB when:

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The engine hood is opened with the shift lever is in D (Drive)

- The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes

- The vehicle stands on a steep slope

- The vehicle moves several times

(Continued)

(Continued)

In these cases, the parking brake warning light comes on, the AUTO

HOLD indicator changes from green to white, and a warning sound and a message will appear to inform you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving off again, press foot brake pedal, check the surrounding area near your vehicle and release parking brake manually with the EPB switch.

• If the AUTO HOLD indicator changes to yellow, the Auto Hold is not working properly. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• While operating Auto Hold, you may hear mechanical noise. However, it is normal operating noise.

WARNING

• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly when you start the vehicle.

• For your safety, cancel the

Auto Hold when you drive downhill, back up the vehicle or park the vehicle.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the driver's door or engine hood open detection system, the Auto Hold may not work properly.

We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

5

5-31


Warning messages


■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B

OLF054131N/OLF044411N

Parking brake automatically locked

When the EPB is applied from Auto

Hold, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OTLE055028/OLFH044408L

AUTO HOLD deactivating.

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

When this message is displayed, the

Auto Hold and EPB may not operate.

For your safety, depress the brake pedal.

OLF054127N/OLF044407N

Press brake pedal to deactivate

AUTO HOLD

If you did not apply the brake pedal when you release the Auto Hold by pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

5-32

OPDE056108

AUTO HOLD conditions not met.

Close door and hood, then fasten seatbelt

When you press the [AUTO HOLD] switch, if the driver's door and engine hood are not closed or the driver's seat belt is unfastened, a warning will sound and a message will appear on the LCD display. At this moment, press the [AUTO HOLD] button after closing the driver's door and engine hood, and fastening the seat belt.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions.

• Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

• Tire chains are installed on your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

ABS is an electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.

5

5-33


Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from sudden changes in direction, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay on for several seconds after the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ( ) is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, we recommend that you contact your HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light ( ) may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and turn the engine off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

5-34

i

Information

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light ( ) may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) (if equipped)

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.

OIG057033L

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle's brakes and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

5-35

5


ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ESC and the ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds and goes off, then the ESC is turned on.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

engine may not respond to the accelerator as it does under routine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise

Control automatically disengages.

The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road conditions allow.

See "Cruise Control System" later in this chapter.

(if equipped)

• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) may not increase even if you press the accelerator pedal deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and does not indicate a problem.

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction Control disabled" will illuminate. In this state, the traction control function of ESC (engine management) is disabled, but the brake control function of ESC (braking management) still operates.

5-36

• State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 seconds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction & Stability

Control disabled" illuminates and a warning chime sounds. In this state, both the traction control function of

ESC (engine management) and the brake control function of ESC (braking management) are disabled.

If the ignition switch is placed to the

LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,

ESC remains off. Upon restarting the vehicle, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

Indicator lights

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.

If ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the

ESC off while the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tires installed.

5

5-37


ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC to maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the transmission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively while the ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed.

The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are displayed.

• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

i

Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or standard brake system operation.

Vehicle Stability Management

(if equipped)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tires can suddenly become uneven.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.

• Never drive too fast for the road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad weather, slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.

5-38

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately above 15 km/h (9 mph) on curve roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately above 20 km/h (12 mph) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.

i

Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as gradient or incline.

• Driving rearward.

• ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• EPS (Electric power steering) warning light ( ) is on or blinks.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.

WARNING

If ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the VSM system. When the warning light illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized tires and wheels installed.

5

5-39


Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

(if equipped)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. The system operates the brakes automatically for approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake after 2 seconds or when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the accelerator pedal when starting off on a incline. The HAC activates only for approximately 2 seconds.

i

Information

• The HAC does not operate when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N

(Neutral)

• The HAC activates even when the

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off. However, it does not activate, when the ESC does not normally operate.

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)

(if equipped)

The Emergency Stop Signal system alerts the driver behind by blinking the stop lights, while sharply and severely braking.

The system is activated when:

• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The deceleration power exceeds 7 m/s 2 , and the driving speed exceeds 55 km/h (34 mph).)

• The ABS is activated and the driving speed exceeds 55 km/h (34 mph).

The hazard warning flasher automatically turns ON after blinking the stop lights, when the driving speeds is decelerated under 40 km/h (25 mph), when the ABS is deactivated, and when the sudden braking situation is over.

The hazard warning flasher turns

OFF, when the driving speed exceeds

10 km/h (6 mph) after a complete stop. The hazard warning flasher turns OFF, when the vehicle drives at a low speed for a certain period of time. The driver can manually turn

OFF the hazard warning flasher by pressing the button.

i

Information

The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) system will not activate, when the hazard warning flasher already blinks.

5-40

Good braking practices

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.

Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed. Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and we recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

5

5-41


D RIIV E M OD E IIN TE AT ED

■ Type A

CO NT OL YS EM F E QU PE

The mode changes whenever the

DRIVE MODE button is pressed.

• SMART mode :

SMART mode automatically adjusts the driving mode (ECO ↔

COMFORT ↔ SPORT) in accordance with the driver's driving habits.

■ Type B

OIG056058

OIG056029

The drive mode may be selected according to the driver's preference or road condition.

OIG056121

• COMFORT mode :

COMFORT mode provides smooth and comfortable driving.

• SPORT mode :

SPORT mode provides sporty riding.

• ECO mode :

ECO mode improves fuel efficiency for eco-friendly driving.

The driving mode will be continuously maintained, as selected when the engine is restarted. However, except if it is in SPORT mode. SPORT mode will change to COMFORT mode, when the engine is restarted.

5-42

ECO mode

When the Drive Mode is set to ECO mode, the engine and transmission control logic are changed to maximize fuel efficiency.

• When the ECO mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the ECO indicator will illuminate.

• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode, when the engine is turned OFF and restarted the Drive Mode setting will remain in ECO mode.

i

Information

Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

When ECO mode is activated:

• The acceleration response may be slightly reduced as the accelerator pedal is depressed moderately.

• The air conditioner performance may be limited.

• The shift pattern of the automatic transmission may change.

• The engine noise may get louder.

The above situations are normal conditions when ECO mode is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of ECO mode operation:

If the following conditions occur while

ECO mode is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is low:

The system will be limited until engine performance becomes normal.

• When driving up a hill:

The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because engine torque is restricted.

• When driving the vehicle with the automatic transmission gear shift lever in manual shift mode:

The system will be limited according to the shift location.

• When the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed for a few seconds:

The system will be limited, judging that the driver wants to speed up.

5

5-43


SPORT mode

SPORT mode manages the driving dynamics by automatically adjusting the steering effort, the engine and transmission control logic for enhanced driver performance.

• When SPORT mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the SPORT indicator will illuminate.

• Whenever the engine is restarted, the Drive Mode will revert back to

COMFORT mode. If SPORT mode is desired, re-select SPORT mode from the DRIVE MODE button.

• When SPORT mode is activated:

- The engine rpm will tend to remain raised over a certain length of time even after releasing the accelerator

- Upshifts are delayed when accelerating i

Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.

SMART mode

SMART mode selects the proper driving mode among ECO, NORMAL, and SPORT by judging the driver's driving habits (i.e. mild or dynamic) from the brake pedal depression or the steering wheel operation.

• SMART mode automatically controls the vehicle driving, such as gear shifting patterns, engine torque, and riding quality in accordance with the driver's driving habits.

• Press the DRIVE MODE button to activate SMART mode. When

SMART mode is activated, the indicator illuminates on the instrument cluster.

• The indicator illuminates in green, when the driver's driving is categorized to be mild. It illuminates in white, when the driver's driving is categorized to be normal. It illuminates in yellow, when the driver's driving is categorized to be dynamic during abrupt braking or sharp curving.

• The vehicle starts in SMART mode again, when the engine was turned

OFF in SMART mode.

i

Information

• When you mildly drive the vehicle in SMART mode, the driving mode changes to ECO mode to improve fuel efficiency. However, the actual fuel efficiency may differ in accordance with your driving situations

(i.e. upward/downward slope, vehicle deceleration/acceleration).

• When you dynamically drive the vehicle in SMART mode by abruptly decelerating or sharply turning the driving mode changes to SPORT mode. However, it may adversely affect fuel economy.

5-44

Drive mode indicator screen

The drive mode indicator screen can be displayed by using the trip computer button on the steering wheel.

drive mode indicator screen displays the status of current drive mode.

• DRIVE MODE button is located on the lower part of the transmission lever for selecting drive mode. If drive mode is selected manually by the user, the drive mode indicator screen will show user-selected drive mode. (COMFORT, ECO, or

SPORT)

If SMART mode is selected by

DRIVE MODE button, the drive mode indicator screen will show current drive mode automatically selected by SMART mode system.

(SMART COMFORT, SMART

ECO, or SMART SPORT)

• When the trip computer mode is selected to show drive mode and the SMART mode is in operation, an automatically selected driving mode SMART ECO, SMART

COMFORT, or SMART SPORT will be selected on the LCD display.

And right below is the horizontal driving style gauge which reflects the driving style in real time.

• If you drive carefully and slowly in

SMART mode, the left side of the driving style gauge will illuminate, and automatically shift to the

SMART ECO mode.

When the driver accelerates more frequently, the right side of the driving style gauge will fill up, and shift to SMART COMFORT mode.

In addition, if the rate of acceleration and speed is high, drive mode will change to SMART SPORT mode.

• If the auto cruise control function is operated or the transmission is shifted to manual shift mode while

SMART mode is on, the SMART mode will stop temporarily, and the drive mode will be displayed as

OFF. The driving style gauge light will be turned off accordingly.

• If the trip computer is not set to show drive mode indicator screen, and you want to know the on/off status of the SMART mode, simply check whether the letters 'SMART' is lighten up on the screen or not

(green - ECO MODE, white -

COMFORT MODE, red - SPORT

MODE).

5

5-45


OIG046196L

Driving style gauge

Once the SMART mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, and the drive mode indicator screen is selected by pressing the trip computer button on the steering wheel, the driving style gauge bar will show up at the bottom of screen and visualize current style of driving.

• Left poles of the driving style gauge indicates degree of economic and gentle driving in green color. The more economic and gentle you drive, the more left poles will light up in green.

Likewise, the right pole of the driving style gauge indicates degree of aggressive and sporty driving in red color. The faster and more aggressive you drive, the more far right poles will light up in red.

• When driving style gauge fills up toward left side (or Economic side) and kept for certain time, then your vehicle will be automatically switch to SMART ECO mode. Likewise, when driving style gauge fills up toward right side (or Aggressive side) and kept for certain time, then your vehicle will be automatically the switch to SMART SPORT mode.

• If you wish to maintain the SMART

ECO mode for better fuel economy, try to maintain economic driving style and keep the driving style gauge green.

Various driving situations, which you may encounter in

SMART mode

• The driving mode automatically changes to ECO mode after a certain period of time, when you gently depress the accelerator pedal

(Your driving is categorized to be mild.).

• The driving mode automatically changes from SMART ECO mode to SMART NORMAL mode after a certain period of time, when you sharply or repetitively depress the accelerator pedal.

• The driving mode automatically changes to SMART NORMAL mode with the same driving patterns, when the vehicle starts to drive on an upward slope of a certain angle. The driving mode automatically returns to SMART ECO mode, when the vehicle enters a leveled road.

5-46

• The driving mode automatically changes to SMART SPORT, when you abruptly accelerate the vehicle or repetitively operate the steering wheel (Your driving is categorized to be sporty.). In this mode, your vehicle drives in a lower gear for abrupt accelerating/decelerating and increases the engine brake performance.

• You may still sense the engine braking performance, even when you release the accelerator pedal in SMART SPORT mode. It is because your vehicle remains in lower gear over a certain period of time for next acceleration. Thus, it is a normal driving situation, not indicating any malfunction.

• The driving mode automatically changes to SMART SPORT mode only in harsh driving situations. In most of the normal driving situations, the driving mode sets to be either in SMART ECO mode or in

SMART NORMAL mode.

Limitation of SMART mode

The SMART mode may be limited in following situations. (The OFF indicator illuminates in those situations.)

• The driver manually moves the shift lever :

It deactivates SMART mode. The vehicle drives, as the driver manually moves the shift lever.

• The cruise control is activated :

The cruise control system may deactivate the SMART mode when the vehicle is controlled by the set speed of the smart cruise control system. (SMART mode is not deactivated just by activating the cruise control system.)

• The transmission oil temperature is either extremely low or extremely high :

The SMART mode can be active in most of the normal driving situations. However, an extremely high/ low transmission oil temperature may temporarily deactivate the

SMART mode, because the transmission condition is out of normal operation condition.

5-47

5


B LIIN D S PO T D ET CT SY ST BS D)) ((IIF UIIP PE

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)

Blind spot area

Closing at high speed

OIG056035

The Blind Spot Detection System

(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear bumper to monitor and warn the driver of an approaching vehicle in the driver's blind spot area.

The system monitors the rear area of the vehicle and provides information to the driver with an audible alert and a indicator on the outside rearview mirrors.

The blind spot detection range varies relative to vehicle speed.

Note that if your vehicle is traveling much faster than the vehicles around you, the warning will not occur.

(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)

The Lane Change Assist feature will alert you when a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent lane at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when the system detects an oncoming vehicle, the system sounds an audible alert. The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.

(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse. The feature will operate when the vehicle is moving in reverse below about 10 km/h (6 mph). If oncoming cross traffic is detected a warning chime will sound.

5-48

The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.

WARNING

• Always be aware of road conditions while driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Blind Spot

Detection System is operating.

• The Blind Spot Detection

System (BSD) is not a substitute for proper and safe driving.

Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up the vehicle. The

Blind Spot Detection System

(BSD) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /

LCA (Lane Change Assist)

(if equipped)


OIG057034L

To operate:

Press the BSD switch with the

Ignition switch in the ON position.

The indicator on the BSD switch will illuminate. When the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (20 mph), the system will be activated.

To cancel:

Press the BSD switch again. The indicator on the switch will go off.

When the system is not used, turn the system off by turning off the switch.

The system will activate when:

1. The system is on.

2. The vehicle speed is above about

30 km/h (20 mph).

3. An oncoming vehicle is detected in the blind spot area.

i

Information

• If the vehicle is turned off then on again, the BSD system returns to the previous state.

• When the system is turned on, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.

5

5-49


■ Left side ■ Left side ■ Right side

■ Right side

OIG056036

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror.

Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off according to the driving conditions of the vehicle.

OIG056037 OIG056038

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system

(the warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror) AND

2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mirror will also blink.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deactivated.

5-50

• The second stage alarm may be deactivated.

- To deactivate the warning chime:

Go to the 'User Settings → Sound and deselect Blind Spot Detection

Sound' on the LCD display.

- To activate the warning chime:

Go to the 'User Settings → Sound and select Blind Spot Detection

Sound' on the LCD display.

Detecting sensor Warning message

i

Information

The warning chime function helps alert the driver. Deactivate this function only when it is necessary.

OIG056039

The sensors are located inside the rear bumper.

Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

OIG056177L

Blind Spot Detection disabled.

Radar blocked.

• This warning message may appear when :

- One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.

- Driving in rural areas where the

BSD sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.

- When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

- A trailer or carrier is installed. (To use the BSD system, remove the trailer or carrier from your vehicle.)

5-51

5


If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BSD switch and the system will turn off automatically.

When the BSD canceled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed, the BSD system should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


OAD055091L/OTLE055040

Check BSD system

If there is a problem with the BSD system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. We recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) (if equipped)

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.


To operate:

Go to the 'User Settings → Driving

Assist and select Rear Cross Traffic

Alert' on the LCD display.

The system will turn on and standby to activate. The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 10 km/h

(6.2 mph) and with the shift lever in R

(Reverse).

5-52

i

Information

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) detecting range is approximately

0.5 m ~ 20 m (1 ft ~ 65 ft). An approaching vehicle will be detected if their vehicle speed is within 4 km/h ~

36 km/h (2.5 ~ 22.5 mph ).

Note that the detecting range may vary under certain conditions. As always, use caution and pay close attention to your surroundings when backing up your vehicle.

Warning type

■ Left ■ Right

OIG056150L/OIG056151L

If the vehicle detected by the sensors approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound, the warning light on the outside rearview mirror will blink and a message will appear on the LCD display.

i

Information

• The warning chime will turn off when the detected vehicle moves out of the sensing area or when the vehicle is right behind your vehicle or when the vehicle is not approaching your way or when the speed of the other vehicle slows down.

• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to your surrounding.

• If the sensing area near the rear bumper is blocked by either a wall or barrier or by a parked vehicle, the system sensing area may be reduced.

i

Information

Turn off the system by pressing the

BSD switch and deselecting Rear

Cross Traffic Alert from the User

Settings mode on the cluster when using a trailer or carrier behind your vehicle.

5

5-53


WARNING

• The warning light on the outside rearview mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system.

To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.

• Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a

Blind Spot Detection System

(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA). Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding before changing lanes or backing the vehicle up.

The system may not alert the driver in some conditions so always check your surroundings while driving.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The Blind Spot Detection

System (BSD) and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a substitute for proper and safe driving practices.

Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up your vehicle. The Blind

Spot Detection System (BSD) may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

NOTICE

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.

• The sensing range differs somewhat according to the width of the road. When the road is narrow, the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane

Or when the road is wide, the system may not detect other vehicles in the next lane.

• The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.

Non-operating condition

The BSD indicator on the outer side view mirror may not illuminate properly when:

• The outside rearview mirror housing is damaged.

• The mirror is covered with dirt, snow, or debris.

• The window is covered with dirt, snow, or debris.

• The window is tinted.

5-54

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

• The vehicle drives on a curved road or through a tollgate.

• The vehicle is turning left or right at a crossroad.

• The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.

• The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.

• The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.

• The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in the luggage compartment, abnormal tire pressure, etc.

• The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.

• There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail, person, animal, etc.

• The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances such as a construction zone, railroad, etc.

• A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.

• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.

• A flat trailer is near.

• If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.

• When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

• While changing lanes.

• While going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.

• When the other vehicle approaches very close.

• When a trailer or carrier is installed.

• When the temperature near the rear bumper area is high or low.

• When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

• When the detected vehicle also moves back, as your vehicle drives back.

• If there are small objects in the detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.

• If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.

• When other vehicles are close to your vehicle.

• When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you

OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane from you.

• When driving through a narrow road with many trees or bushes.

• When driving through a large area with few cars or structures around, such as a desert, rural area, etc.

• When driving on wet surface.

5

5-55


A UT ON OM US ME RG EN Y B RA KIIN

The Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB) system is designed to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

AE B)) ((IIF EQ UIIP

WARNING

D))

Take the following precautions when using the Autonomous

Emergency Braking (AEB):

• This system is only a supplemental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. AEB does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.

System setting and activation

System setting

• The driver can activate the AEB by placing the ignition switch to the

ON position and by selecting:

'User Settings → Driving Assist →

Autonomous Emergency Braking'

The AEB deactivates, when the driver cancels the system setting.

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel the AEB system. The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) is turned off (Traction & Stability control disabled.) If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, we recommend you to have the system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

5-56

• The driver can select the initial warning activation time on the LCD display.


Assist → Forward Collision Warning

→ Late/Normal/Early'.

The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning includes the following:

- Early:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision

Warning is activated earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Even though, 'Early' is selected if the front vehicle suddenly stops the initial warning activation time may not seem fast.

- Normal:


Warning is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

- Late:


Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

Select 'Late' when traffic is light and when driving speed is slow.

Prerequisite for activation

The AEB gets ready to be activated, when the AEB is selected on the

LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied.

- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is on.

- To enable the system to detect pedestrians ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be between 8 km/h – 70 km/h (5 mph – 45 mph).

- To enable the system to detect a vehicle ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be between 8 km/h –

180 km/h (5 mph – 110 mph).

When traveling above 80 km/h (50 mph), the AEB system only initiates partial braking. This is to prevent unintended full braking to stop in the middle of the highway.

5

5-57


WARNING

• Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate/ deactivate the AEB system.

• The AEB automatically activates upon placing the Engine

Start/Stop button to the ON position. The driver can deactivate the AEB by canceling the system setting on the LCD display.

• The AEB automatically deactivates upon canceling the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control).

When the ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot be activated on the LCD display.

AEB warning message and system control

The AEB produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels, such as abrupt stopping of the vehicle in front, insufficient braking distance, or pedestrian detection. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User

Settings in the LCD display. The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning include Early,

Normal or Late initial warning time.

Forward Warning (1

st

warning)

OIG056116L

This initial warning message appears on the LCD display and the head up display (if equipped) with a warning chime.

5-58

Collision Warning (2

nd

warning) Emergency braking

(3

rd

warning)

OIG056117L

This warning message appears on the LCD display and the head up display (if equipped) with a warning chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may decelerate moderately.

- The AEB system limitedly controls the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision.

OIG056118L

This warning message appears on the LCD display and the head up display (if equipped) with a warning chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs by the engine management system to help decelerate the vehicle.

- If the detected vehicle in front is driving slower than 80 km/h (50 mph) your vehicle speed may decelerate sharply to avoid a collision. If the detected vehicle in front is driving faster than 80 km/h (50 mph), your vehicle speed may decelerate moderately.

- If your vehicle drives slower than

70 km/h (45 mph) with a pedestrian in front, the driving speed may abruptly decrease. When your vehicle drives faster than 70 km/h

(45 mph) with a pedestrian in front, the AEB does not operate.

5

5-59


Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driver's depressing the brake pedal.

• The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.

• The AEB brake control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.

CAUTION

The driver should always use extreme caution while operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from the AEB system.

WARNING

The braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver should hold the responsibility to safely drive and control the vehicle.

WARNING

The AEB system logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the

AEB system.

AEB sensor

■ Front radar

■ Front camera

OIG056026

WARNING

Never deliberately drive dangerously to activate the system.

OIG056027

In order for the AEB system to operate properly, always make sure the radar sensor cover is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.

5-60

NOTICE

• Do not apply license plate molding or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor.

Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor and cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the AEB system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the AEB system may not operate properly. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by authorized

HYUNDAI.

• Use only genuine parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

NOTICE

• NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windshield, nor tint the front windshield.

• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.

• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

i

Information

We recommend you have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:

• The windshield glass is replaced.

• The camera or related parts are repaired or removed.

5-61

5


Warning message and warning light

System malfunction


OAE056031L

Auto Emergency Braking disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the AEB system operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor cover before operating the AEB system.

The AEB may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the engine.

5-62

OTLE055071/OAE056038L

Check AEB system

• When the AEB is not working properly, the AEB warning light ( ) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light

( ) will illuminate. In this case, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The AEB warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) warning light.

WARNING

• The AEB is only a supplemental system for the driver's convenience. The driver should hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the AEB system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.

• In certain instances and under certain driving conditions, the AEB system may activate prematurely. This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. The AEB system may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If there is a malfunction with the

AEB system, the autonomous emergency braking is not applied even though the braking system is operating normally.

• If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system.

Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

• The AEB system may activate during braking and the vehicle may stop suddenly shifting loose objects toward the passengers.

Always keep loose objects secured.

• The AEB system may not activate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a collision.

• The AEB system operates only to detect vehicles or pedestrians in front of the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

The AEB system does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.

The AEB system is not designed to detect other objects on the road such as animals.

The AEB system does not detect vehicles in the opposite lane.

The AEB system does not detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.

The AEB system cannot detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead end street.)

In these cases, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.


The Autonomous Emergency Braking

(AEB) system is designed to monitor the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

In certain situations, the radar sensor or the camera may not be able to detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. In these cases, the AEB system may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where the

AEB operation may be limited.

5

5-63


Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera

• There is interference by electromagnetic waves

• There is severe irregular reflection from the radar sensor

• The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motorcycle or a bicycle, etc.)

• The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)

• The driver's field of view is not well illuminated (either too dark or too much reflection or too much backlight that obscures the field of view)

• The vehicle in front does not have their rear lights properly turned ON

• The outside brightness changes suddenly, for example when entering or exiting a tunnel

• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed

• The vehicle in front is driving erratically

• The vehicle drives through a construction area, on an unpaved road, or above metal materials, such as a railway

• The vehicle drives inside a building, such as a basement parking lot

• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving

OAE056100

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the AEB system may be limited when driving on a curved road.

In certain instances on a curved road, the AEB system may activate prematurely.

Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle traveling on a curved road.

In these cases, the driver must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

5-64

OAE056101

The AEB system may recognize a vehicle in the next lane when driving on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnecessarily alarm the driver and apply the brake.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, while driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the accelerator pedal to prevent the system from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle.

ODH053094

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the AEB decreases while driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.

When the AEB suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

OAE056103

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the AEB system may not immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

5-65

5


OAE056109

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the AEB system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

ODH053100

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you

If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required.

The AEB system may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians

The sensor may be limited when:

• The pedestrian is not fully detected by the camera recognition system, for example, if the pedestrian is leaning over or is not fully walking upright

• The pedestrian is moving very quickly or appears abruptly in the camera detection area

• The pedestrian is wearing clothing that easily blends into the background, making it difficult to be detected by the camera recognition system

• The outside lighting is too bright

(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.

when driving on a dark rural road at night)

• It is difficult to detect and distinguish the pedestrian from other objects in the surroundings, for example, when there is a group of pedestrians or a large crowd

• There is an item similar to a person's body structure

• The pedestrian is small

5-66

• The pedestrian has impaired mobility

• The sensor recognition is limited

• The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera

• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed

• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving

WARNING

• Do not use the Autonomous

Emergency Braking system when towing a vehicle.

Application of the AEB system while towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.

• Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.

• The AEB system is designed to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as luggage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never try to test the operation of the AEB system. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.

i

Information

In some instances, the AEB system may be cancelled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.

5

5-67


L AN E D EP RT E W AR NIIN SY ST LD WS F E QU PE

WARNING

OIG056027

This Lane Departure Warning System detects the lane with the sensor at the front windshield and warns you when your vehicle leaves the lane.

WARNING

The Lane Departure Warning

System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function. It is the responsibility of the driver to always be aware of the surrounding and steer the vehicle.

Take the following precautions when using the Lane Departure

Warning System (LDWS):

• ALWAYS check your surroundings and the road conditions before changing lanes.

The LDWS does not control the vehicle to change lanes or to stay in the current lane.

• Do not make abrupt maneuvers or turn the steering wheel suddenly if the LDWS alerts you that the vehicle is departing from the lane.

• If the camera recognition system does not properly detect the lane, the LDWS may not notify you if the vehicle departs from the lane.

• The LDWS does not operate until the vehicle speed reaches approximately 60 km/h (37 mph).

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not disassemble the LDWS camera temporarily to tint the window or attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, we recommend you take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

• When you replace the windshield glass or LDWS camera, we recommend you take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

• Do not spray water or any type of liquid near the camera.

The system may become damaged.

• Do not attempt to repair the

LDWS camera and do not remove any parts.

(Continued)

5-68

(Continued)

• Do not place objects that reflect light on the dashboard while driving.

• Do not place any accessories near the inside rearview mirror.

• You may not hear a warning sound of LDWS because of the excessive audio sound.

• The operation of the LDWS may be affected by several factors including environmental conditions that affect the ability of the camera to detect the lanes in front of you. It is the responsibility of the driver to pay careful attention to the roadway and to maintain the vehicle in its intended lane at all times.

LDWS operation

OIG056028L

To activate/deactivate the LDWS:

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the LDWS button located on the instrument panel on the lower left hand side of the driver.

The indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white. This indicates the LDWS is in the READY but

NOT ENABLED state.

The color of indicator will change depending on the condition of

LDWS.

- White : Sensor does not detect lane lines or vehicle speed is under 40mph

(64kph).

- Green : Sensor detects lane lines.

5

5-69


■ Lane line undetected ■ Lane line detected • If your vehicle speed exceeds 60 km/h (40 mph) and the LDWS button is ON, the system is enabled. If your vehicle departs from the projected lane in front of you, the

LDWS operates as follows:

■ Left ■ Right


Check LDWS

OIG056178L/OIG056179L

• To see the LDWS screen on the

LCD display in the cluster, select

ASSIST mode ( ). For more details, refer to "LCD Modes" in chapter 3.

• If the system detects a lane line, the color changes from gray to white.

• If the system detects the left lane line, the left lane line color will change from gray to white.

• If the system detects the right lane line, the right lane line color will change from gray to white.

OIG056180L/OIG056181L

A visual warning appears on the cluster LCD display. Either the left lane line or the right lane line in the cluster LCD display will blink depending on which direction the vehicle is veering.

OAE056164L

If there is a problem with the system a message will appear for a few seconds.

If the problem continues the LDWS failure indicator will illuminate.

5-70

LDWS failure indicator

The LDWS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate if the LDWS is not working properly. We recommend you to have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

When there is a problem with the system, do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turning the vehicle off and on again.

• Check if the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e.g. fog, heavy rain, etc.)

• Check if there is foreign matter on the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we recommend you have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


The LDWS may operate prematurely even if the vehicle does not depart from the intended lane, OR, the

LDWS may not warn you if the vehicle leaves the intended lane under the following circumstances:

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane marking from the road surface or the lane marking is faded or not clearly marked.

• There are markings on the road surface that look like a lane line that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

• The lane line is merged or divided.

(e.g. tollgate)

• The lane number increases or decreases or the lane marker are crossing complicatedly.

• There are more than two lane lines on the road in front of you.

• The lane line is very thick or thin.

• The lanes ahead are not visible due to rain, snow, water on the road, damaged or stained road surface, or other factors.

• The shadow is on the lane marker by a median strip, guardrail, noise barriers, etc.

• The lanes are incomplete or the area is in a construction zone.

• The lane line in a tunnel is stained with dirt or oil.

• The brightness outside changes suddenly such as when entering or exiting a tunnel.

• The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel.

• There is a boundary structure in the roadway such as a concrete barrier, guardrail and reflector post that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road.

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare.

• The lane suddenly disappears such as at the intersection.

5

5-71


• There is not enough distance between you and the vehicle in front to be able to detect the lane line or the vehicle ahead is driving on the lane line.

• Driving on a steep grade, over a hill, or when driving on a curved road.

• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving.

• The surrounding of the inside rear view mirror temperature is high due to direct sunlight.

• The windshield or the LDWS camera lens is blocked with dirt or debris.

• The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed.

• Placing objects on the dashboard.

5-72

L AN E K EE PIIN G A SIIS T S ST M ((L KA F E QU PE

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist

System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function. It is the responsibility of the driver to always be aware of the surrounding and steer the vehicle.

OIG056027

The Lane Keeping Assist System detects lane lines on the road, with a camera at the front windshield, and assists the driver's steering to help keep the vehicle between lanes.

When the system detects the vehicle straying from its lane, it alerts the driver with a visual and audible warning, while applying a slight countersteering torque, trying to prevent the vehicle from moving out of its lane.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Lane Keeping

Assist System (LKAS):

• The steering wheel is not continuously controlled so if the vehicle speed is at a higher rate when leaving a lane the vehicle may not be controlled by the system.

• Do not steer the steering wheel suddenly when the steering wheel is being assisted by the system.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• LKAS prevents the driver from moving out of the lane unintentionally by assisting the driver's steering. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane.

• The operation of the LKAS can be cancelled or not work properly according to road condition and surroundings.

Always be cautious when driving.

• Do not disassemble the LKAS camera temporarily to tint the window or attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, we recommend you take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

(Continued)

5

5-73


(Continued)

• When you replace the windshield glass, LKAS camera or related parts of the steering wheel, we recommend you take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

• The system detects lane lines and controls the steering wheel by a camera, therefore, if the lane lines are hard to detect, the system may not work properly.

Please refer to "Limitations of the system".

• Do not remove or damage the related parts of LKAS.

• You may not hear a warning sound of LKAS because of the excessive audio sound.

• Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if the sunlight is reflected.

(Continued)

5-74

(Continued)

• Do not place any accessories near the rearview mirror.

• Do not tint the windshield glass.

• Always have your hands on the steering wheel while the

LKAS system is activated. If you continue to drive with your hands off the steering wheel after the "Keep hands on steering wheel" warning message appears, the system will turn off automatically.

• If vehicle speed is high, steering torque for assistance will not be enough to keep your vehicle within the lane. If so, the vehicle may move out of its lane.

• If you attach objects to the steering wheel, the system may not assist steering or the hands off alarm may not work properly.

LKAS operation

OIG057028L

To activate/deactivate the LKAS:

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the LKAS button located on the instrument panel on the lower left hand side of the driver. (Lower right hand side of the driver for RHD vehicles.)

The indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white. This indicates the LKAS is in the READY but

NOT ENABLED state.

The color of indicator will change depending on the condition of LKAS.

- White : Sensor does not detect lane lines or vehicle speed is under 40 mph

(64 kph).

- Green : Sensor detects lane lines and the system is able to control vehicle steering.

LKAS activation

OIG056170L

• To see the LKAS screen on the

LCD display in the cluster, select

ASSIST mode ( ). For more details, refer to "LCD Modes" in chapter 3.

• When both lane lines are detected and all the conditions to activate the LKAS are satisfied, a green steering wheel indicator will illuminate and the LKAS indicator light will change from white to green.

This indicates that the LKAS system is in the ENABLED state and the steering wheel will be able to be controlled.

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist

System is a system to prevent the driver from leaving the lane.

However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always check the road conditions when driving.

5

5-75


■

Lane line undetected

■

Lane line detected • If your vehicle speed exceeds 60 km/h (40 mph) and the LKAS button is ON, the system is enabled. If your vehicle departs from the projected lane in front of you, the

LKAS operates as follows:

■ Left lane line ■ Right lane line

OIG056171L/OIG056172L

• If the system detects a lane line, the color changes from gray to white.

• If the system detects the left lane line, the left lane line color will change from gray to white.

• If the system detects the right lane line, the right lane line color will change from gray to white.

• Both lane lines must be detected for the system to fully activate.

OAEE056129L

Keep hands on steering wheel

If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel for several seconds while the LKAS is activated, the system will warn the driver.

OIG056175L/OIG056176L

A visual warning appears on the cluster LCD display. Either the left lane line or the right lane line in the cluster LCD display will blink depending on which direction the vehicle is veering.

If the steering wheel appears, the system will control the vehicle’s steering to prevent the vehicle from crossing the lane line.

i

Information

If the steering wheel is grabbed slightly, the message may appear because

LKAS may treat the situation as the steering wheel is not grabbed.

5-76

WARNING

The warning message may appear late according to road conditions. Therefore, always have your hands on the steering wheel while driving.

WARNING

• The driver is responsible for accurate steering.

• Turn off the system and drive the vehicle in below situations.

- In bad weather

- In bad road condition

OAEE056130L

Driver's grasp not detected.

LKAS will be disabled momentarily

If the driver still does not have their hands on the steering wheel after the message "Keep hands on steering wheel", the system will not control the steering wheel and warn the driver only when the driver crosses the lane lines.

However, if the driver has their hands on the steering wheel again, the system will start controlling the steering wheel.

needs to be controlled by the driver frequently.

i

Information

• Even though the steering is assisted by the system, the driver may control the steering wheel.

• The steering wheel may feel heavier when the steering wheel is assisted by the system than when it is not.

5

5-77



Check LKAS

OAEE056131L

If there is a problem with the system a message will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the

LKAS failure indicator will illuminate.

LKAS failure indicator

The LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate if the LKAS is not working properly. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

When there is a problem with the system do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turning the engine off and on again.

• Check if the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check if the system is affected by the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain, etc.)

• Check if there is foreign matter on the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The LKAS system will not be in the

ENABLED state and the steering wheel will not be assisted when:

• The turn signal is turned on before changing a lane. If you change lanes without the turn signal on, the steering wheel might be controlled.

• The vehicle is not driven in the middle of the lane when the system is turned on or right after changing a lane.

• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or

VSM (Vehicle Stability Management) is activated.

• The vehicle is driven on a sharp curve.

• Vehicle speed is below 60 km/h (40 mph) and over 200 km/h (125 mph).

• The vehicle makes sharp lane changes.

• The vehicle brakes suddenly.

• Only one lane line is detected.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.

• There are more than two lane lines on the road. (e.g. construction area)

5-78

• Radius of a curve is too small.

• The steering wheel is turned suddenly.

• The vehicle is driven on a steep incline.

Limitations of the System

The LKAS may operate prematurely even if the vehicle does not depart from the intended lane, OR, the

LKAS may not warn you if the vehicle leaves the intended lane under the following circumstances:

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane marking from the road surface or the lane marking is faded or not clearly marked.

• There are markings on the road surface that look like a lane line that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

• The lane line is merged or divided.

(e.g. tollgate)

• The lane number increases or decreases or the lane marker are crossing complicatedly.

• There are more than two lane lines on the road in front of you.

• The lane line is very thick or thin.

• The lanes ahead are not visible due to rain, snow, water on the road, damaged or stained road surface, or other factors.

• The shadow is on the lane marker by a median strip, guardrail, noise barriers, etc.

• The lanes are incomplete or the area is in a construction zone.

• There are crosswalk signs or other symbols on the road.

• The lane line in a tunnel is stained with dirt or oil.

• The brightness outside changes suddenly such as when entering or exiting a tunnel.

• The brightness outside is too low such as when the headlamps are not on at night or the vehicle is going through a tunnel.

• There is a boundary structure in the roadway such as a concrete barrier, guardrail and reflector post that is inadvertently being detected by the camera.

• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road.

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare.

• The lane suddenly disappears such as at the intersection.

5-79

5


• There is not enough distance between you and the vehicle in front to be able to detect the lane line or the vehicle ahead is driving on the lane line.

• Driving on a steep grade, over a hill, or when driving on a curved road.

• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving.

• The surrounding of the inside rear view mirror temperature is high due to direct sunlight.

• The windshield or the LKAS camera lens is blocked with dirt or debris.

• The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed.

• Placing objects on the dashboard.

• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to road conditions.

• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.

• Driving through a toll plaza or tollgate.

• Driving on uneven surface.

• An object on roadside which may resemble road markers.

LKAS function change

The driver can change LKAS to Lane

Departure Warning System (LDWS) or change the LKAS mode between

Standard LKA and Active LKA from the LCD display.


Assist → Lane Keeping Assist

System → Lane Departure

Warning/Standard LKA/ Active LKA'.

The system is automatically set to

Standard LKA if a function is not selected.

Lane Departure Warning

LDWS alerts the driver with a visual warning and a warning alarm when the system detects the vehicle departing the lane. The steering wheel will not be controlled.

Standard LKA

The Standard LKA mode guides the driver to keep the vehicle within the lanes. It rarely controls the steering wheel, when the vehicle drives well inside the lanes. However, it starts to control the steering wheel, when the vehicle is about to deviate out of the lanes.

Active LKA

The Active LKA mode provides more frequent steering wheel control in comparison with the Standard LKA mode. Active LKA can reduce the driver’s fatigue to assist the steering for maintaining the vehicle in the middle of the lane.

5-80

D RIIV R A TE TIIO N A LE T S ST DA A)) ((IIF UIIP PE

The Driver Attention Alert (DAA), system is to warn the driver with any hazardous driving situations upon detecting the driver's fatigue level or inattentive driving practices.

• The driver can select the Driver

Attention Alert system mode.

- Off : The Driver Attention Alert system is deactivated.

System setting and activation

System setting

- Normal : The Driver Attention

Alert system alerts the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices.

• The Driver Attention Alert system is set to be in the OFF position, when your vehicle is first delivered to you from the factory.

- Early : The Driver Attention Alert system alerts the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices faster than Normal mode.

• To turn ON the Driver Attention

Alert system, turn on the engine, and then select 'User Settings →

Driving Assist → Driver Attention

Alert → Normal/Early' on the LCD display.

• The set-up of the Driver Attention

Alert system will be maintained, as selected, when the engine is restarted.

Prerequisite for activation

The Driver Attention Alert system is operable, when driving speed is between 60 km/h (40 mph) and 200 km/h (125 mph).

Display of the driver's attention level

■ System off

■ Attentive driving

■ Inattentive driving

OPDE056125

OPDE056061

5

OPDE056062

5-81


• The driver can monitor their driving conditions on the LCD display.

The DAA screen will appear when you select the Assist Mode tab on the LCD display if the system is activated.

(For more information, refer to "LCD Modes" in chapter

3.)

• The driver's attention level is displayed on the scale of 1 to 5. The lower the number is, the more inattentive the driver is.

• The number decreases when the driver does not take a break for a certain period of time.

• The number increases when the driver attentively drives for a certain period of time.

Take a break

OPDE056063

• The "Consider taking a break" message appears on the LCD display and a warning sounds in order to suggest the driver to take a break, when the driver’s attention level is below 1.

• The Driver Attention Alert system does not suggest the driver to take a break, when the total driving time is shorter than 10 minutes.

Resetting the system

• The last break time is set to 00:00 and the driver's attention level is set to 5 (very attentive) when the driver resets the Driver Attention

Alert system.

• The Driver Attention Alert system resets the last break time to 00:00 and the driver's attention level to 5 in the following situations.

- The engine is turned OFF.

- The driver unfastens the seat belt and then opens the driver's door.

- The engine has been idled continuously over 10 minutes.

• The Driver Attention Alert system operates again, when the driver restarts driving.

5-82

System standby System malfunction

OPDE056126

The Driver Attention Alert system enters the ready status and displays the 'Standby' screen in the following situations.

- The camera sensor keeps failing to detect the lanes.

- Driving speed remains under 60 km/h (40 mph) or over 200 km/h

(125 mph).

OPDE056065

When the "Check System" warning message appears, the system is not working properly. In this case, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

• The Driver Attention Alert system is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

• The driver, who feels fatigued, should take a break, even though there is no break suggestion by the Driver Attention

Alert system.

5

5-83


NOTICE

The Driver Attention Alert system utilizes the camera sensor on the front windshield for its operation.

To keep the camera sensor in the best condition, you should observe the followings:

• NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windshield, nor tint the front windshield.

• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the Driver Attention Alert

(DAA) system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera sensor out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.

• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the Driver Attention Alert system warning sounds.

CAUTION

The Driver Attention Alert system may not properly operate with limited alerting in the following situations:

• The lane detection performance is limited. (For more information, refer to "Lane

Keeping Assist System

(LKAS)" in this chapter.)

• The vehicle is violently driven or is abruptly turned for obstacle avoidance (e.g. construction area, other vehicles, fallen objects, bumpy road).

• Forward drivability of the vehicle is severely undermined (possibly due to wide variation in tire pressures, uneven tire wear-out, toein/toe-out alignment).

• The vehicle drives on a curvy road.

• The vehicle drives on a bumpy road.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The vehicle drives through a windy area.

• The vehicle is controlled by the following driving assist systems:

- Lane Keeping Assist System

(LKAS)

- Autonomous Emergency

Braking (AEB) System

5-84

C RU E C NT OL F E QU PE

Cruise Control operation


1. Cruise indicator

2. SET indicator

OIG056122/OIG056122L

The Cruise Control system allows you to drive at speeds above 30 km/h

(20 mph) without depressing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit in your country.

• If the Cruise Control is left on,

(cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Cruise Control system off (cruise indicator light

OFF) when the Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Cruise Control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not use the Cruise Control when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads windy roads

- When driving in windy areas

• Do not use cruise control when towing a trailer.

- When driving with limited view (possibly due to bad weather such as fog, snow, rain and sandstorm)

5

5-85

Driving your vehicle i

Information

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the ignition or starting the vehicle.

5-86

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG056188L

To set Cruise Control speed


OIG056185L

Cruise control switch

CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control operation.

CANCEL/ : Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

OIG056021L/OIG056182L

1. Press the CRUISE/ button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise indicator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 30 km/h

(20 mph).

To increase Cruise Control speed

OIG056022L

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it. The SET indicator light will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

i

Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, while driving uphill or downhill.

OIG056023L

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and hold it, while monitoring the

SET speed on the instrument cluster.

Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase 2.0

km/h (1.2 mph) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

5

5-87


To decrease Cruise Control speed

OIG056022L

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and hold it.Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease 2.0

km/h (1.2 mph) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch down (SET-).

5-88

To temporarily accelerate with the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at the increased speed, the

Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.

Cruise Control will be canceled when:


OIG056024L/OIG056183L

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL/O button located on the steering wheel.

• Pressing the CRUISE/ button.

Both the cruise indicator and the

SET indicator will turn OFF.

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less than approximately 30 km/h

(20 mph).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in manual shift mode.

To resume preset Cruising speed

To turn Cruise Control off

■ Type A ■ Type B i

Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but only pressing the

CRUISE/ button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise

Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the

CRUISE/ button.

OIG056023L

Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If the vehicle speed is over 30 km/h (20 mph), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.

OIG056021L/OIG056182L

• Press the CRUISE/ button (the cruise indicator light will go off).

5

5-89


A DV NC D S AR T C RU E C NT RO SY ST M ((IIF QU PE

WARNING

For your safety, please read the owner's manual before using the

Smart Cruise Control system.

➀ Cruise indicator

➁ Set speed

➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

OIG056123

To see the SCC screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select ASSIST mode ( ). For more details, refer to

"LCD Modes" in chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control System allows you to program the vehicle to maintain constant speed and distance detecting the vehicle ahead without depressing the accelerator/ brake pedal.

WARNING

The Smart Cruise Control

System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

Take the following precautions :

• Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit in your country.

• If the Smart Cruise Control is left on, (cruise ( ) indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Smart Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Smart Cruise

Control System off (cruise

( ) indicator light

OFF) when the Smart Cruise

Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Smart Cruise Control

System only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

5-90

(Continued)

• Do not use the Smart Cruise

Control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads

- When driving on a steep downhill or uphill

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving in parking lots barriers

- When driving on a sharp curve

- When driving with limited view (possibly due to bad weather, such as fog, snow, rain or sandstorm)

- When the vehicle sensing ability decreases due to vehicle modification resulting level difference of the vehicle's front and rear

Smart cruise control switch

■ Type A

■ Type B

OIG056186L

OIG056187L

CANCEL/O : Cancels cruise control operation.

CRUISE/ : Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+ : Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET- : Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

5-91

5


Smart Cruise Control speed

To set Smart Cruise Control speed


OIG056021L/OIG056182L

1. Push the CRUISE/ button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( indicator will illuminate.

)

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

The Smart Cruise Control speed can be set as follows:

• 30 km/h (20 mph)~180 km/h

(110 mph) : when there is no vehicle in front

• 0 km/h (0 mph)~180 km/h (110 mph) : when there is a vehicle in front

5-92

OIG056022L

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-). The Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the

LCD display will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

i

Information

Vehicle speed may decrease on an upward slope and increase on a downward slope.

To increase Smart Cruise

Control set speed

CAUTION

Check the driving condition before using the toggle switch.

Driving speed sharply increases, when you push up and hold the toggle switch.

To decrease the Smart Cruise

Control set speed

OIG056023L

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 km/h (1 mph) each time you move the toggle switch up in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 10 km/h (5 mph).

Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 180 km/h

(110 mph).

OIG056022L

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 km/h (1 mph) each time you move the toggle switch down in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 10 km/h (5 mph).

Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 30 km/h

(20 mph).

5

5-93


To temporarily accelerate with the Smart Cruise Control on

If you want to speed up temporarily when the Smart Cruise Control is on, depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere with Smart Cruise Control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again pedal.

i

Information

Be careful when accelerating temporarily, because the speed is not controlled automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you.

Smart Cruise Control will be temporarily canceled when:


OIG056024L/OIG056183L

Cancelled manually

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL/ button located on the steering wheel.

The Smart Cruise Control turns off temporarily when the Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator on the LCD display turns off.

The cruise ( illuminated continuously.

) indicator is

Cancelled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.

• The shift lever is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).

• The parking brake is applied.

• The vehicle speed is over 190 km/h (120 mph).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), TCS (Traction Control

System) or ABS is operating.

• The ESC is turned off.

• The sensor or the cover is dirty or blocked with foreign matter.

• The vehicle is stopped for a certain period of time.

• The vehicle stops and goes repeatedly for a long period of time.

• The accelerator pedal is continuously depressed for a long period of time.

• The engine performance is abnormal.

• The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down

(SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, approximately 3 minutes after the vehicle is stopped by the

Smart Cruise Control System with no other vehicle ahead.

5-94

• The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down

(SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, after stopping the vehicle with a vehicle stopped far away in front.

• The AEB is activated.

Each of these actions will cancel the

Smart Cruise Control operation. The

Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance on the LCD display will go off.

In a condition the Smart Cruise

Control is cancelled automatically, the Smart Cruise Control will not resume even though the RES+ or

SET- toggle switch is pushed.

i

Information

If the Smart Cruise Control is cancelled by other than the reasons mentioned, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE056165L

Smart Cruise Control cancelled

If the system is cancelled, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions.

Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control set speed

If any method other than the cruise toggle switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically resume when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-).

If you push the toggle switch up

(RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. However, if vehicle speed drops below 30 km/h (20 mph), it will resume when there is a vehicle in front of your vehicle.

i

Information

Always check the road conditions when you push the toggle switch up

(RES+) to resume speed.

5

5-95


To turn Cruise Control off


Smart Cruise Control Vehicleto-Vehicle Distance

To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance

For example, if you drive at 90 km/h

(56 mph), the distance maintain as follows:

Distance 4 - approximately 52.5 m

Distance 3 - approximately 40 m

Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m

Distance 1 - approximately 25 m

OIG056021L/OIG056182L

• Press the CRUISE/ button (the cruise ( ) indicator light will go off).

OIG056055L

When the Smart Cruise Control

System is ON, you can set and maintain the distance from the vehicle ahead of you without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows:

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2 i

Information

The distance is set to the last set distance when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine.

Distance 1

5-96

When the lane ahead is clear: When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:

WARNING

Distance 4 Distance 3

OIG056123L

The vehicle speed will maintain the set speed.

Distance 2 Distance 1

OIG056123/OIG056125/OIG056126/OIG056127

• Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected distance.

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed after accelerating to the set speed.

OIG056128

When using the Smart Cruise

Control System:

• The warning chime sounds and the Vehicle-to Vehicle

Distance indicator blinks if the vehicle is unable to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

• If the warning chime sounds, depress the brake pedal or use the steering wheel toggle switch to actively adjust the vehicle speed, and the distance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

5

5-97


(Continued)

• Even if the warning chime is not activated, always pay attention to the driving conditions to prevent dangerous situations from occurring.

• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

CAUTION

In traffic situation

OIG056129L

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 30km/h) disappears to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message "Watch for surrounding vehicles" will appear. Adjust your vehicle speed for vehicles or objects that can suddenly appear in front of you by depressing the brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the road condition ahead.

OPDE056091

Use switch or pedal to accelerate

• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehicle ahead of you starts moving, your vehicle will start as well. However, if the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds, you must depress the accelerator pedal or push up the toggle switch (RES+) or push down the toggle switch

(SET-) to start driving.

5-98

• If you push the advanced smart cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while Auto Hold and advanced smart cruise control is operating the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation and the vehicle will start to move. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white. (if equipped with EPB

(Electronic Parking Brake))

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead

Warning message

OIG056026

The Smart Cruise Control uses a sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.

OAE056166L

Smart Cruise Control disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the

Smart Cruise Control System operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor lens cover before operating the Smart Cruise Control

System. The Smart Cruise Control system may not properly activate, if the radar is totally contaminated, or if any substance is not detected after turning ON the engine (e.g. in an open terrain).

5-99

5

Driving your vehicle i

Information

For the SCC operation is temporarily stopped if the radar is blocked, but you wish to use cruise control mode (speed control function), you must convert to the cruise control mode (refer to “To convert to Cruise Control mode” in the following page.

CAUTION

• Do not apply license plate molding or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor and lens cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the Smart

Cruise Control System may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the Smart

Cruise Control System may not operate properly. We recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Use only genuine HYUNDAI parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

OAE056167L

Check Smart Cruise Control System

The message will appear when the vehicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally.

We recommend that you take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

5-100

To adjust the sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control

The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings →

Driving Assist → Smart Cruise

Control Speed → Slow/Normal/Fast' on the LCD display. You may select one of the three stages you prefer.

- Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed.

- Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is normal.

- Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed.

To convert to Cruise Control mode

The driver may choose to only use the Cruise Control mode (speed control function) by doing as follows:

1. Turn the Smart Cruise Control

System on (the cruise indicator light will be on but the system will not be activated).

2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance button for more than 2 seconds.

3. Choose between "Smart Cruise

Control" and "Cruise Control".

When the system is canceled using the CRUISE/ button or the

CRUISE/ button is used after the engine is turned on, the Smart

Cruise Control mode will turn on.

i

Information

The last selected speed sensitivity of the smart cruise control is remained in the system.

WARNING

When using the Cruise Control mode, you must manually adjust the distance to other vehicles by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal. The system does not automatically adjust the distance to vehicles in front of you.

5-101

5



The Smart Cruise Control System may have limits to its ability to detect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions.

On curves

On inclines

OAE056100

• The Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed on curves and apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if necessary.

5-102

OAE056101

Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed.

Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of the

Smart Cruise Control.

ODH053094

• During uphill or downhill driving, the Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

Lane changing

OAE056103

• A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognized by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range.

• The radar may not detect immediately when a vehicle cuts in suddenly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a slower vehicle moves into your lane, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

• If a faster vehicle which moves into your lane, your vehicle will accelerate to the set speed.

Vehicle recognition

OAE056104

Some vehicles in your lane cannot be recognized by the sensor:

- Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles

- Vehicles offset to one side

- Slow-moving vehicles or suddendecelerating vehicles

- Stopped vehicles

- Vehicles with small rear profile such as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of following occurs:

- When the vehicle is pointing upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment

- While the steering wheel is operating

- When driving to one side of the lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or on curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

5

5-103


OAE056108

• Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that the vehicle ahead of you is not detected, drive with caution.

OAE056109

• When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056110

• Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead.

5-104

ODH053100

• Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles carrying loads that sticks out from the back of the vehicle.

WARNING

When using the Smart Cruise

Control take the following precautions:

• If an emergency stop is necessary, you must apply the brakes. The vehicle cannot be stopped at every emergency situation by using the Smart

Cruise Control System.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Keep a safe distance according to road conditions and vehicle speed. If the vehicle to vehicle distance is too close during a high-speed driving, a serious collision may result.

• Always maintain sufficient braking distance and decelerate your vehicle by applying the brakes if necessary.

• The Smart Cruise Control

System cannot recognize a stopped vehicle, pedestrians or an oncoming vehicle.

Always look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

• Vehicles moving in front of you with a frequent lane change may cause a delay in the system's reaction or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in an adjacent lane.

Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Always be aware of the selected speed and vehicle to vehicle distance.

The driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.

• The Smart Cruise Control

System may not recognize complex driving situations so always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.

NOTICE

The Smart Cruise Control System may not operate temporarily due to:

• Electrical interference

• Modifying the suspension

• Differences of tire abrasion or tire pressure

• Installing different type of tires

5

5-105


S PE CIIA L D VIIN G C ND TIIO

Hazardous driving conditions

S

When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the bellow suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use the second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spinning.

• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional traction while being stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING

Downshifting with an automatic transmission while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tires can increase very quickly. If the tires become damaged, a tire blow out or tire explosion can occur.

This condition is dangerous you and others may be injured.

Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tires or the engine.

DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 56 km/h

(35 mph).

5-106

i

Information

The ESC system (if equipped) must be turned OFF before rocking the vehicle.

NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the transmission, and tire damage. See "Towing" in chapter 6.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlamps.

• Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if equipped)

• Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

• Be sure your tires have enough tread. If your tires do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident.

See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7 .

• Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

5-107

5


• If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

Driving at higher speeds on the highway consumes more fuel and is less efficient than driving at a slower, more moderate speed. Maintain a moderate speed in order to conserve fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine coolant level and the engine oil before driving.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged tires, which may reduce traction or fail the braking operation.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.

i

Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tires.

5-108

Reducing the risk of a rollover

Your multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility

Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. The specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles making them more likely to roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, do not load your vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control:

• Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers.

• Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.

• Keep tires properly inflated.

• Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.

WARNING

In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure all passengers are wearing their seat belts.

5

5-109


WIIN TE R D VIIN G

The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tires and cause other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions: i

Information

Information for Snow Tires and Tire

Chains in the national language

(Bulgarian, Hungarian, Icelandic,

Polish) is provided in the Appendix.

Snow or icy conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

WARNING

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle’s handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

i

Information

Do not install studded tires without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

5-110

Tire chains

OIG056052

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner than other types of tires, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains.

Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; if unavoidable use a wire type chain less than 9 mm wide or AutoSock

(fabric snow chain). If tire chains must be used, use genuine

HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.

WARNING

The use of tire chains may adversely affect vehicle handling:

• Drive less than 30 km/h (20 mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.

i

Information

• Install tire chains on the front tires.

It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tires will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

• Do not install studded tires without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

5

5-111


Chain Installation

When installing tire chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as possible.

Drive slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tire chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

When mounting tire chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard

Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing tire chains.

NOTICE

When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.

• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving

0.5~1.0 km (0.3~0.6 miles).

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

5-112

Check battery and cables

The winter temperature increases the battery consumption.

Inspect the battery and cables, as specified in the chapter 7.

The battery charging level can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or in a service station.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect the spark plugs, as specified in the chapter 7.

If necessary, replace them. Also check all ignition wirings and components for any cracks, wear-out, and damage.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some regions during winter, it is recommended to use the "winter weight" oil with lower viscosity. For further information, refer to the chapter 8. When you are not sure about a type of winter weight oil, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

To prevent locks from freezing

To prevent the locks from being frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid or glycerin into key holes. When a lock opening is already covered with ice, spray approved de-icing fluid over the ice to remove it. When an internal part of a lock freezes, try to thaw it with a heated key. Carefully use the heated key to avoid an injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze solution in system

To prevent the window washer from being frozen, add authorized window washer anti-freeze solution, as specified on the window washer container. Window washer anti-freeze solution is available from an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer, and so are the most vehicle accessory outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze solution to prevent any damage to the vehicle paint.

5

5-113


Do not let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.

When there is the risk that your parking brake may freeze, temporarily apply it with the shift lever in P

(Park). Also, block the rear wheels in advance, so the vehicle may not roll.

Then, release the parking brake.

Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in such conditions during the severe winter, you should check underneath the vehicle on a regular basis, so that moving the front wheels and the steering components is unblocked.

Carry emergency equipment

In accordance with weather conditions, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment, while driving.

Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

Do not place objects or materials in the engine compartment

Putting objects or materials in the engine compartment may cause an engine failure or combustion, because those may block the engine cooling. Such damage will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.

5-114

V EH LE EIIG T

Two labels on your driver’s door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the driver’s door sill.

Overloading

WARNING

The Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the Certification

Label attached to the driver's

(or front passenger’s) door.

Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

5

5-115


T RA ER OW G

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

5-116

What to do in an emergency

Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2

If the engine stalls while driving ...................................6-2

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-2

If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-2

If the Engine Will Not Start..................................6-3

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly...............................................................6-3

If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start .......................................................................6-3

Jump Starting..........................................................6-4

If the Engine Overheats........................................6-7

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-9

Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-9

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-10

Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-11

Low Tire Pressure Position and

Tire Pressure Telltale .....................................................6-11

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Malfunction Indicator.....................................................6-12

Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-13

If You Have a Flat Tire........................................6-15

Jack and tools ..................................................................6-15

Changing tires ..................................................................6-16

Jack label...........................................................................6-21

EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-22

Towing ...................................................................6-23

Towing service .................................................................6-23

Removable towing hook ................................................6-24

Emergency towing ..........................................................6-24

Emergency Commodity........................................6-27

Fire extinguisher .............................................................6-27

First aid kit........................................................................6-27

Triangle reflector ............................................................6-27

Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-27

6


H AZ RD AR NIIN FL SH R

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

N C AS E O F A N E ME RG NC Y

W HIIL E D VIIN G

If the engine stalls while driving

• Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.

• Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OIG066001

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button with the Engine

Start/Stop button in any position. The button is located in the center fascia panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, if safe to do so, move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead.

6-2

Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, move the shift lever into P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle), apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.

F T HE NG E W NO T S AR

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

If the engine turns over normally but doesn’t start

• Be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) if it is an automatic transaxle vehicle. The engine starts only when the shift lever is in

N (Neutral) or P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle. See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this chapter.

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if necessary.

If the engine still does not start, we recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

Push or pull starting the vehicle may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can lead to damage to the emission control system.

6

6-3


JJU MP AR TIIN

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

(Continued)

6-4

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle’s battery cables are connected to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these components with the engine running or when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON position.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-) jumper cables to touch. It may cause sparks.

• The battery may rupture or explode when you jump start with a low or frozen battery.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.

i

Pb

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the engine compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle) and set the parking brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

6

6-5


OIG066004

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/ chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

6-6

F T HE NG E O RH EA S

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

WARNING

While the engine is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving parts such as the cooling fan and drive belt to prevent serious injury.

4. Check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)

5. If engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and we recommend that you call an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNING

NEVER remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

Turn the engine off and wait until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

6

6-7


6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, we recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

• Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and we recommend the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

6-8

TIIR E P ES UR E M NIIT OR SY ST TP MS F E QU PE

Check Tire Pressure

• The displayed tire pressure values may differ from those measured with a tire pressure gauge.

• You can change the tire pressure unit in the User Settings Mode on the cluster.

- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "LCD

Modes" section in chapter 3) .

OIG066006

OIG066035L

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low Tire Pressure Position

Telltale and Tire Pressure Telltale

(Shown on the LCD display)

OIG066036L

• You can check the tire pressure in the Assist Mode on the cluster.

Refer to the "LCD Modes" section in chapter 3.

• Tire pressure is displayed after a few minutes of driving after initial engine start up.

• If tire pressure is not displayed when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive to display" message will appear.

After driving, check the tire pressure.

6

6-9


Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

6-10

NOTICE

If any of the below happens, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is placed to the ON position or engine is running.

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tire Pressure Position

Telltale remains illuminated.


Telltale


Position and Tire

Pressure Telltale

OIG066035L

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated and warning message displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The Low Tire

Pressure Position Telltale will indicate which tire is significantly underinflated by illuminating the corresponding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will remain on and the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated (when the vehicle is driven approximately

10 minutes at speed above 25 km/h

(15.5 mph)) until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

i

Information

The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure sensor.

6-11

6


CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

Low Tire Pressure Telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

TPMS (Tire Pressure

Monitoring System)

Malfunction Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the Low Tire Pressure

Position Telltale will not be displayed even though the vehicle has an under-inflated tire.

6-12

NOTICE

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is near electric power supply cables or radio transmitters such as police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may illuminate if snow chains are used or electronic devices such as computers, chargers, remote starters, navigation, etc. This may interfere with normal operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure and Position telltales will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. Tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI dealer may damage the tire pressure sensor.

The spare tire (if equipped) does not come with a tire pressure monitoring sensor. When the low pressure tire or the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will remain on. Also, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator will illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is driven at speed above 25 km/h (15.5 mph) for approximately 10 minutes.

Once the original tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sensor is reinflated to the recommended pressure and reinstalled on the vehicle, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go off within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicators do not extinguish after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem (except for the spare tire). You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

You may not be able to identify a tire with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold.

6

6-13


A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

WARNING

TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system’s ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions.

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING

For EUROPE

• Do not modify the vehicle; it may interfere with the TPMS function.

• The wheels on the market do not have a TPMS sensor.

For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If you use the wheels on the market, use a TPMS sensor approved by a HYUNDAI dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with a

TPMS sensor or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic vehicle inspection conducted in your country.

❈ All vehicles sold in the EUROPE market during below period must be equipped with TPMS.

- New model vehicle :

Nov. 1, 2012 ~

- Current model vehicle :

Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle registrations)

6-14

F Y OU AV E A LA

WARNING

TIIR E

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in this section when changing a tire to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.

Jack and tools

CAUTION

Be careful as you use the jack handle to stay clear of the flat end. The flat end has sharp edges that could cause cuts.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel nut wrench

OIG066031

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment under the luggage box cover.

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

OIG066032

Turn the winged hold down bolt counterclockwise to remove the spare tire.

Store the spare tire in the same compartment by turning the winged hold down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tire and tools from "rattling", store them in their proper location.

6

6-15


OIG066033

If it is hard to loosen the tire holddown wing bolt by hand, you can loosen it easily using the jack handle.

1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of the tire hold-down wing bolt.

2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise with the jack handle.

Changing tires

WARNING

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a jack causing serious injury or death to you or those nearby.

Take the following safety precautions:

• Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a tire in the lane of traffic.

ALWAYS move the vehicle completely off the road on level, firm ground away from traffic before trying to change a tire. If you cannot find a level, firm place off the road, call a towing service for assistance.

• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.

• ALWAYS place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and NEVER on the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

(Continued)

6-16

(Continued)

• Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Keep children away from the road and the vehicle.

Follow these steps to change your vehicle's tire:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle), apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position.

3. Press the hazard warning flasher button.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.

■

Front

■

Rear

OIG066025

5. Block both the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite of the tire you are changing.

OIG066027

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each in the order shown above, but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off of the ground.

OIG066028

7. Place the jack at the designated jacking position under the frame closest to the tire you are changing. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two notches and two dimples.

Never jack any other position or part of the vehicle. It may damage to the side seal molding.

6

6-17


OIG066029

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Make sure the vehicle is stable on the jack.

9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel lug nut wrench and remove them with your fingers. Remove the wheel from the studs and lay it flat on the ground out of the way.

Remove any dirt or debris from the studs, mounting surfaces, and wheel.

10. Install the spare tire onto the studs of the hub.

11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fingers onto the studs with the smaller end of the lug nuts closest to the wheel.

12. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

OIG066037L

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. Double-check each lug nut until they are tight. After changing tires, we recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the lug nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

The wheel lug nut should be tightened to 11~13 kgf.m

(79~94 lbf.ft).

6-18

If you have a tire gauge, check the tire pressure (see "Tires and

Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or higher than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and adjust it to the recommended pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After changing tires, secure the flat tire and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

NOTICE

Check the tire pressure as soon as possible after installing a spare tire. Adjust it to the recommended pressure.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the studs and lug nuts. Make certain during tire changing that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled. If you have to replace your lug nuts make sure they have metric threads to avoid damaging the studs and ensure the wheel is properly secured to the hub. We recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

If any of the equipment such as the jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equipment is damaged or in poor condition, do not attempt to change the tire and call for assistance.

Use of compact spare tires

(if equipped)

Compact spare tires are designed for emergency use only. Drive carefully on the compact spare tire and always follow the safety precautions.

WARNING

To prevent compact spare tire failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire only in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle over 80 km/h (50 mph).

• Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load rating or the load carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

• Do not use the compact spare tire continuously. Repair or replace the original tire as soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tire.

6

6-19


When driving with the compact spare tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after installing the compact spare tire.

The compact spare tire should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire's tread life is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

NOTICE

When the original tire and wheel are repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nut torque must be set correctly. The correct lug nut tightening torque is 11~13 kgf·m

(79~94 lbf·ft).

CAUTION

To prevent damaging the compact spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards, such as a potholes or debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 25 mm (1 inch).

• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel.

6-20

Jack label

■ Example

• Type A

• Type B

• Type C

OHYK065010

OHYK065011

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.

8. Move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transaxle.

9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and address

OHYK064002

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

6-21

6


EC Declaration of conformity for Jack

6-22

JACKDOC14S

T OW G

Towing service

Dolly

OIG066020

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

Dolly

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

OIG066015

OIG066016

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

6

6-23


When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies:

1. Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook

1. Open the trunk, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

Emergency towing

■

Front

CAUTION

Failure to place the shift lever in

N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

■

Rear

OIG066017

OIG066017

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

OIG066038L

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

6-24

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

Always follow these emergency towing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position so the steering wheel is not locked.

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced braking performance.

• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

OIG066019

• Use a towing cable or chain less than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during towing.

• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.

6

6-25


CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing:

• Always pull straight ahead when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to

15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when towing to avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle.

6-26

E ME GE CY MM OD Y ((IIF

Your vehicle is equipped with emergency commodities to help you respond to emergency situation.

EQ UIIP D))

First aid kit

Supplies for use in giving first aid such as scissors, bandage and adhesive tape, etc. are provided.

Fire extinguisher

If there is small fire and you know how to use the fire extinguisher, follow these steps carefully.

1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of the extinguisher that keeps the handle from being accidentally pressed.

2. Aim the nozzle towards the base of the fire.

3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away from the fire and squeeze the handle to discharge the extinguisher. If you release the handle, the discharge will stop.

4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the base of the fire. After the fire appears to be out, watch carefully since it may re-ignite.

Triangle reflector

Place the triangle reflector on the road to warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is parked by the roadside due to problems.

Tire pressure gauge

(if equipped)

Tires normally lose some air in dayto-day use, and you may have to add a air periodically and usually it is not a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal wear. Always check tire pressure when the tires are cold because tire pressure increases with temperature.

To check the tire pressure, take the following steps:

1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is located on the rim of the tire.

2. Press and hold the gauge against the tire valve. Some air will leak as you begin and more will leak if you don't press the gauge in firmly.

3. A firm non-leaking push will activate the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to see whether the tire pressure is low or high.

5. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure. Refer to "Tires and Wheels" in chapter 8.

6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.

6

6-27

Maintenance

Engine compartment .............................................7-3

Maintenance services ...........................................7-5

Owner's responsibility......................................................7-5

Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-5

Owner maintenance...............................................7-6

Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-7

Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-9

Normal maintenance schedule (for europe) ............7-10

Maintenance under severe usage and low mileage conditions (for europe) ..........................7-14

Normal maintenance schedule (except europe)......7-16

Maintenance under severe usage conditions

(except europe) ...............................................................7-20

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.7-22

Engine oil ..............................................................7-26

Checking the engine oil level .......................................7-26

Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-28

Engine coolant......................................................7-29

Checking the coolant level ...........................................7-29

Changing the coolant .....................................................7-31

Brake fluid ............................................................7-32

Checking the brake fluid level .....................................7-32

Washer fluid .........................................................7-34

Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-34

Parking brake .......................................................7-34

Checking the parking brake .........................................7-34

Air cleaner ............................................................7-35

Filter replacement...........................................................7-35

Climate control air filter .....................................7-37

Filter inspection...............................................................7-37

Filter replacement...........................................................7-37

Wiper blades .........................................................7-38

Blade inspection ..............................................................7-38

Blade replacement ..........................................................7-38

Battery...................................................................7-40

For best battery service................................................7-40

Battery capacity label....................................................7-42

Battery recharging .........................................................7-42

Reset items .......................................................................7-43

7

Tires and wheels ..................................................7-44

Tire care ............................................................................7-44

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-44

Checking tire inflation pressure ..................................7-46

Tire rotation .....................................................................7-47

Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-48

Tire replacement .............................................................7-48

Wheel replacement .........................................................7-50

Tire traction......................................................................7-50

Tire maintenance ............................................................7-50

Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-50

Low aspect ratio tire ......................................................7-55

Fuses......................................................................7-56

Fuse/Relay panel description ......................................7-62

Light bulbs.............................................................7-70

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and fog lamp light bulb replacement .................................7-71

Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-73

Rear combination light bulb replacement .................7-73

High mounted stop lamp replacement.......................7-74

License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-75

Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-75

Appearance care ..................................................7-77

Exterior care ....................................................................7-77

Interior care......................................................................7-82

Emission control system .....................................7-85

1. Crankcase emission control system .....................7-85

2. Evaporative emission control system...................7-85

3. Exhaust emission control system .........................7-86

E NG E C MP TM EN

Gasoline Engine (Theta 2.4L GDI)

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Radiator cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil filler cap

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Fuse box

9. Battery

7

OIG076001

7-3

Maintenance

Gasoline Engine (Lambda 3.0 GDI)

Gasoline Engine (Lambda 3.0/3.5 MPI)

7-4

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Radiator cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil filler cap

7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

8. Fuse box

9. Battery

OIG076002/OIG076004

M AIIN EN NC E S ER VIIC S

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI’s high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance service and record retention are the owner’s responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Service Passport.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

Owner maintenance precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. Several procedures can be done only by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Service Passport provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7

7-5

Maintenance

O WN R M AIIN TE NC E

WARNING

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous.

If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS follow these precautions for performing maintenance work:

• Park your vehicle on level ground, move the shift lever into the P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle) position, apply the parking brake, place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

• Block the tires (front and back) to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jewelry that can become entangled in moving parts.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If you must run the engine during maintenance, do so out doors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery and fuel-related parts.

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

7-6

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid level.

• Check for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or

“hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle

P (Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

7

7-7

Maintenance

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Fall)

• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and hood hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

7-8

S CH DU ED AIIN EN NC E S ER VIIC S

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.

If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km(10 miles) in freezing temperature

• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads

• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

• Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine

• Driving in heavy traffic area

• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly

• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack

• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing

• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

7

7-9

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (FOR EUROPE)

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Drive belts * 1

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

12

10

15

24

20

30

36

30

45

48

40

60

60

50

75

72

60

90

84

70

105

96

80

120

At first, inspect at 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months

Engine oil and engine oil filter * 2

Fuel Additives * 3

Air cleaner filter

R

I

R R R R R R

Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months

I R I I R I

R

I

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

* 1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).

Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.

* 2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.

* 3 : If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

7-10

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) (FOR EUROPE)

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Spark plugs * 4

Valve clearance * 5

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Theta 2.4 GDI


12 24 36 48 60 72 84

10

15

20

30

30 40 50 60 70

45 60 75 90

Replace every 165,000 km (102,500 miles)

105

I

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

Fuel tank air filter (if equipped)

Vacuum hose

Fuel filter * 6

Fuel lines, hoses and connections

I I I

I

I

I

I

I

I I I

Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day

Cooling system At first, inspect at 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months

96

80

120

I

I

I

I

I

* 4

* 5



: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

* 6 : The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, we recommend replacing the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consulting with an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

7

7-11

Maintenance


MAINTENANCE

ITEM

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Engine coolant * 7

Battery condition

Brake lines, hoses and connections

Brake pedal

Parking brake

Brake fluid

Disc brakes and pads


12

10

15

24

20

30

36

30

45

48

40

60

60

50

75

72

60

90

84

70

105

96

80

120

At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years: after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months * 8

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I



* 7

* 8

: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

7-12


MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Exhaust system

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots

Driveshaft and boots

Tire (pressure & tread wear)

Front suspension ball joints

Bolt and nuts on chassis and body

Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)

Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)

Climate control air filter (if equipped)


12

10

24

20

36

30

48

40

60

50

72

60

84

70

15

I

I

I

I

I

I

30

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

45

I

I

I

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

75

I

I

I

I

I

I

90

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

105

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R R

No check, No service required

I I



I

I

I

I

96

80

120

I

I

I

R

I

7

7-13

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE AND LOW MILEAGE CONDITIONS (FOR EUROPE)

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe and low mileage driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace

Maintenance item

Maintenance operation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 7,500 km (4,650 miles) or 6 months

A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, H, I, J, K

Air cleaner filter

Spark plugs



Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors

Parking brake

R

R

I

I

I

I

Replace more frequently depending on the condition


Inspect more frequently depending on the condition




C, E

A, B, H, I

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, G, H

C, D, G, H

7-14



Automatic transaxle fluid


I

R

Maintenance intervals


Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)


Driving condition

C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

A, C, F, G, I

Climate control air filter R

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature

B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt spread roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E : Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine

C, E

F : Driving in heavy traffic area

G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly

H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack

I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)

K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions and under

15,000 km per year.

7

7-15

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (EXCEPT EUROPE)

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS Months


12 24 36 48 60 72

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Drive belts * 1

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

10

15

20

30

I

30

45

40

60

I

50

75

60

90

I

84

70

105

Engine oil and engine oil filter * 2

For Middle East * 3 , For Central and South America

Except Middle East, Central and South America

R

Replace every 10,000 km (6,200 miles) or 12 months

R R R R R R

96

80

120

I

R

Air cleaner filter

Fuel additives * 4





R

I

R

I

R

R

R

I

R

I

R

R

R

I



R

I



* 1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).

Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.

* 2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.

* 3 : Middle East includes Libya, Algeria, Morocco, Tunisia, Sudan, Egypt and Iran.

* 4 : If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.

Do not mix other additives.

7-16

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) (EXCEPT EUROPE)

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

Spark plugs * 5

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Theta 2.0 GDI


12 24 36 48 60 72 84

10

15

20

30

30 40 50 60

45 60 75 90

Replace every 165,000 km (102,500 miles)

I

70

105

Valve clearance * 6

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

Fuel tank air filter (if equipped)

Vacuum hose

Fuel filter * 7

Fuel lines, hoses and connections

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

R

I

I

I

I I

96

80

120

I

R

I

R

I



* 5 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

* 6

* 7

: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, we recommend replacing the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consulting with an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for details.

7

7-17

Maintenance


MAINTENANCE

ITEM

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000

Cooling system


12 24 36 48 60 72 84

10

15

20

30

30

45

40

60

50

75

60

90

70

105

Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day

At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months

96

80

120

Engine coolant * 8

Battery condition

For Middle East

Except Middle East

Brake lines, hoses and connections

Brake pedal

Parking brake

Brake fluid

Disc brakes and pads

I

I

I

At first replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years: after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months * 9

Inspect every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months

Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months

I

I I

I

I I

I

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I



* 8 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.

An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

* 9 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

7-18


MAINTENANCE

ITEM

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS Months

Miles×1,000

Km×1,000



Tire (pressure & tread wear)


Bolt and nuts on chassis and body

Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)

Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)

Climate control air filter (if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Exhaust system


12 24 36 48 60 72 84

10

15

I

20

30

I

I

30

45

I

40

60

I

I

50

75

I

60

90

I

I

70

105

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

I

I

I

I

R

No check, No service required

I I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R



I

I

I

I

I

I

R

96

80

120

I

I

7

7-19

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS (EXCEPT EUROPE)

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace



Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Engine oil and engine oil filter

For Middle East,

For Central and

South America

Except Middle

East, Central and

South America

R

R



A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, H, I, K, L

Air cleaner filter

Spark plugs



R

R

I

I





C, E

A, B, H, I

C, D, E, F, G

C, D, E, F, G

7-20

Parking brake


Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors





I

I

I

R

R

Maintenance intervals




Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)


Driving condition

C, D, E, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

A, C, F, G, I

C, E

Severe driving conditions

A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature

B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt spread roads

D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E : Driving in the condition of inflowing sand or dust into engine

F : Driving in heavy traffic area

G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly

H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack

I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing

J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)

K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

7

7-21

Maintenance

E XP AN TIIO N O F S HE UL D M AIIN EN AN E IIT S

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter (cartridge)

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections.

We recommend that the fuel filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. We recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

CAUTION

When you are inspecting the belt, place the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

7-22

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that the air cleaner filter be replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect spark plugs when the engine is hot. You may burn yourself.

Valve clearance (Theta Engine)

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system parts, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

7

7-23

Maintenance

Automatic transaxle fluid

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

We recommend that the automatic transaxle fluid changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule.

NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid.

(Refer to

“Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever (or pedal) and cables.

7-24

Brake pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

For more information on checking the pads or lining wear limit, refer to the HYUNDAI web site.

( http://service.hyundai-motor.com

)

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant/ compressor

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

7-25

7

Maintenance

E NG OIIL

Checking the engine oil level

■ 2.4L GDI

■ 3.0/3.5 MPI

■ 3.0 GDI

WARNING

Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

OIG076062L

OIG076064L

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

OIG076063L

7-26

CAUTION

• Do not overfill the engine oil.

It may damage the engine.

• Do not spill engine oil, when adding or changing engine oil. If you drop the engine oil on the engine room, wipe it off immediately.

• When you wipe the oil level gauge, you should wipe it with a clean cloth. When mixed with debris, it can cause engine damage.

■ 2.4L GDI

■ 3.0 GDI

■ 3.0/3.5 MPI

OIG076006 OIG076053

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F.

Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.) 7

OIG076051

7-27

Maintenance

Checking the engine oil and filter

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

We recommend that the engine oil and filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-28

E NG CO LA T

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant concentration level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

CAUTION

• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

• Do not drive with no engine coolant. It may cause water pump failure and engine seizure, etc.

Checking the coolant level

OIG076007

WARNING

Removing radiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system.

When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

7-29

7

Maintenance

WARNING

The electric motor

(cooling fan) is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blades. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

The electric motor (cooling fan) may operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.

OIG076008

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) or soft water.

Bring the level to F (MAX), but do not overfill.

If frequent additions are required, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

7-30

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient

Temperature

-15°C (5°F)

-25°C (-13°F)

-35°C (-31°F)

-45°C (-49°F)

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze

35

40

50

60

Water

65

60

50

40 i

Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of -

35°C (-31°F) and higher.

Changing the coolant

We recommend that the coolant be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as generator.

WARNING

Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

7

7-31

Maintenance

B RA E F D

Checking the brake fluid level

If the fluid level is excessively low, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

Use only the specified brake fluid.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

OIG076009

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the

MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings.

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING

In the event the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Clean filler cap before removing. Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed container.

7-32

WARNING

When changing and adding brake fluid, handle it carefully.

Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result. Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.

A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts.

7-33

7

Maintenance

W AS R F LU

Checking the washer fluid level

OIG076010

The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary.

Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

CAUTION

Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

• Windshield Washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

P AR KIIN BR AK

Checking the parking brake

OIG056019

Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 20 kg (44 lb,

196N) of force. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 3 notch

7-34

R C LE ER

Filter replacement

OIG076011

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it, as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be replaced.

OIG076012

1. Remove the air cleaner filter cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

OIG076013

3. Pull down the lever to the UNLOCK position.

7

7-35

Maintenance i

Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals (refer to “Maintenance

Under Severe Usage Conditions” in this chapter).

OIG076014

4. Replace the air cleaner filter.

Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

NOTICE

• Do not drive with the air cleaner filter removed. This will result in excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts, use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

7-36

C LIIM TE ON RO

Filter inspection

FIIL TE

If the vehicle is operated in the severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you, the owner, replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

Filter replacement

OIG076016

OIG076017

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol( ↓ ) facing downwards.

Otherwise, the climate control effects may decrease, possibly with a noise.

OIG076015

1.With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides.

2.Open the glove box and remove the support strap (1).

OLF074107K

3.Remove the climate control air filter case while pressing the lock on the right side of the cover.

4.Replace the climate control air filter.

5.Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

7

7-37

Maintenance

WIIP ER LA S

Blade inspection

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.

Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

i

Information

OLMB073019

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

7-38

Front windshield wiper blade

OIG076018

For your convenience, move the windshield wiper blades to the service position as follows;

After turning off the engine, move the wiper switch to the single wiping

(MIST) position within 20 seconds and hold the switch more than 2 seconds until the wiper blade is in the fully up position.

OIG077072L

1. Raise the wiper arm after moving the windshield wiper blades to the service position.

OLF074019

3. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

4. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLF074018

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it.

7-39

7

Maintenance

B AT RY

For best battery service

i

Information

- For batteries marked with

UPPER and LOWER

OIG076023

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

OHYK07701

If your vehicle is equipped with the battery marked with LOWER (MIN) and UPPER (MAX) on the side, you can check the electrolyte level.

The electrolyte level should be between LOWER (MIN) and UPPER

(MAX). If the electrolyte level is low, it should be added distilled (demineralized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or other electrolyte).

(Continued)

(Continued)

When refill, be careful not to splash the battery and adjacent components.

And do not overfill the battery cells. It can cause corrosion on other parts.

After then ensure that tighten the cell caps. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Battery dangers

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

(Continued)

7-40

(Continued)

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC

ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery.

Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

(Continued)

(Continued)

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage.

Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switch is in the on position.

Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily injury or death.

CAUTION

If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.

7-41

7

Maintenance

Battery capacity label

■ Example

OLMB073072

❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model name of battery

2. 12V : The nominal voltage

3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity

(in Ampere hours)

4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity (in min.)

5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in amperes by SAE

6. 440A : The cold-test current in amperes by EN

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

WARNING

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

(Continued)

7-42

(Continued)

• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

• The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 3)

• Sunroof (See chapter 3)

• Trip computer (See chapter 3)

• Climate control system

(See chapter 3)

• Clock (See supplied multimedia manual)

7-43

7

Maintenance

TIIR ES ND

Tire care

WH EE S

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than

1.6 km (1 mile).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.

OIG086002

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the vehicle.

WARNING

Tire underinflation

Severe underinflation (70 kPa

(10 psi) or more) can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

7-44

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

CAUTION

• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

WARNING

Tire inflation

Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.

CAUTION

Tire pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km (1 mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

7

7-45

Maintenance

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

WARNING

• Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire.

HYUNDAI recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

7-46

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section

8.

■ without a spare tire

ODH073802

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

i

Information

The outside and inside of the unsymmetrical tire is distinguishable. When installing an unsymmetrical tire, be sure to install the side marked "outside" face the outside. If the side marked "inside" is installed on the outside, it will have a bad effect on vehicle performance.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage.

7

7-47

Maintenance

Wheel alignment and tire balance

Tire replacement

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

Tread wear indicator

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

NOTICE

OLMB073027

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

WARNING

When replacing the tires, recheck and tighten the wheel nuts after driving about 1,000 km (620 miles). If the steering wheel shakes or the vehicle vibrates while driving, the tire is out of balance. Align the tire balance. If the problem is not solved, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-48

WARNING

• Driving on worn-out tires is very hazardous and will reduce braking effectiveness, steering accuracy, and traction.

• Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The use of any other tire size or type may seriously affect ride, handling, ground clearance, stopping distance, body to tire clearance, snow tire clearance, and speedometer reliability.

• It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible, or necessary, then replace the two front or two rear tires as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling.

• The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. Tire size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) (if equipped) to work irregularly.

Compact spare tire replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

7

7-49

Maintenance

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlamp aim and bumper height.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

1

2

5,6

7

3

4

1

OLMB073028

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

7-50

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

225/55R17 97V

225 - Tire width in millimeters.

55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

97 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

7

7-51

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

V

Z

S

T

H

Maximum Speed

180 km/h (112 mph)

190 km/h (118 mph)

210 km/h (130 mph)

240 km/h (149 mph)

Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

3. Checking tire life

(TIN : Tire Identification

Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, tire strength and performance, decline with age naturally (even unused spare tires). Therefore, the tires (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT

Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the

DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2017.

7-52

WARNING

Tire age

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining tread, it is recommended that tires generally be replaced after six (6) years of normal service.

Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this

Warning can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or death.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicles may vary with respect to grade.

7

7-53

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by the law.

WARNING

Tire temperature

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death.

7-54

Low aspect ratio tire

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged.

- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 3,000km.

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.

7

7-55

Maintenance

F US S

■ Blade type

Normal

■ Cartridge type

Normal

■ Multi fuse

Normal

7-56

Normal

Blown

Blown

Blown

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver’s side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver’s side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the engine and all switches off, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

Blown

OLF074075

WARNING

Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

CAUTION

• When replacing a blown fuse or relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.

7

7-57

Maintenance

Inner panel fuse replacement

OIG077073L

1. Turn the engine and all other switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

7-58

Fuse switch

i

Information

OIG077025L

Always, place the fuse switch to the

ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as the audio system and digital clock must be reset and the smart key may not work properly.

OLF044148L

If the fuse switch is OFF, the above message will appear.

CAUTION

• Always place the fuse switch in the ON position while driving the vehicle.

• Place the fuse switch in the

OFF position when the vehicle is parked more than a month to prevent battery discharge.

• Do not move the transportation fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse switch may be damaged.

7

7-59

Maintenance

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement

OIG076026

1. Turn the engine off and all other switches off.

2. Turn all the switches off.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tap and pulling up.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Main fuse

CAUTION

After checking the fuse box in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse box cover. If not, electrical failures may occur from water leaking in.

OIG076027

If the main fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

5. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

7-60

i

Information

If the main fuse is blown, even though the engine compartment panel fuse and inner fuse are not blown, if the electrical system is not operated, the main fuse may be blown. The main fuse is connected with other parts and system. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Multi fuse

OIG076028

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:


2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

i

Information

If the multi fuse is blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

7

7-61

Maintenance

Fuse/Relay panel description

Driver’s side fuse panel

OIG077031L

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

7-62

OIG076068L


Symbol Fuse rating

2

MODULE

10A

POWER

OUTLET

S 2

20A

20A

POWER

HANDLE

MULTI

MEDIA

DRV

15A

20A

30A

10

MODULE

PA SS

10A

30A

9

MODULE

7.5A

15A

10A

E-CALL

RR

25A

Circuit Protected

AMP, CD Player, Analog Clock, Wireless Charger, Audio, IBU Control Module,

Around View Unit, E/R Junction Block (RLY.5)

Front Cigarette Lighter

Sunroof Control Unit (Roller)

Not Used

Audio, CD Player

Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch

Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Driver Door Module

Passenger Seat Manual Switch

IBU Control Module

Multifunction Switch

Not Used

Rear Seat Warmer Control Module

7-63

7

Maintenance


Symbol

LH

Fuse rating

25A

RH

25A

8

MODULE

MEMORY

S 1

2

S PARE

20A

7.5A

10A

10A

10A

30A

7.5A

10A


Driver Safety Power Window Module, Rear Door Module LH

Passenger Safety Power Window Module, Rear Door Module RH

Trunk Relay, Fuel Filler & Trunk Open Switch, E/R Junction Block (RLY.11)

Power Trunk Module

IBU Control Module

Power Trunk Module, A/C Switch, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster,

Head-Up Display, Analog Clock, Security Indicator, IBU Control Module

Sunroof Control Unit (Glass)

-

A/C Switch, A/C Control Module, Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (RLY.1)

IBU Control Module

7-64



4

MODULE

CLU S TER

5

MODULE

7

MODULE

AMP

FR

IND

10A

10A

10A

10A

20A

25A

7.5A

10A

15A

25A


Glove Box Lamp, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Trunk Room Lamp,

Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Room Lamp,

Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Door Mood Lamp,

Driver/Passenger Door Lamp #1/#2, Rear Door Lamp LH/RH,

Rear Door Mood Lamp LH/RH

IBU Control Module

Instrument Cluster, Head-Up Display

Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, Fuel Filler & Trunk Open Switch,

Multifunction Camera Unit, Front Console Upper Cover Switch, Crash Pad Switch,

Smart Cruise Control Unit

Stop Lamp Switch, Driver Door Module

SRS Control Module

AMP

Door Lock/Unlock Relay

Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

Instrument Cluster

7-65

7

Maintenance



6

MODULE

1

3

MODULE

IG1

1

IBU

2

S PARE

2

IBU

BRAKE

S WITCH

AFL S

3

S PARE

1

MODULE

10A

7.5A

10A

25A

15A

10A

10A

10A

7.5A

10A

10A

7.5A


Multipurpose Check Connector, Driver IMS Module, Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror,

Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module,

A/C Switch, A/C Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module

MDPS Unit

Not Used

PCB Block (Fuse : F36/F41/F42)

-

IBU Control Module

IBU Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch

IBU Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

Transaxle Range Switch

-

Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Head Lamp LH/RH

Rain Sensor, Hazard Lamp Switch, Data Link Connector

7-66

Engine compartment fuse panel

■ 2.4 GDI

OIG076029

Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

OIG076070L

■ 3.0 GDI, 3.0/3.5 MPI

OIG076069L

7

7-67

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Type Symbol Fuse rating

1 80A MDPS Unit

MULTI FUSE

(TYPE A)

MULTI FUSE

(TYPE B)

4

3

1

5

2

1

IG2

40A

40A

40A

30A

60A

60A

50A

60A

50A

50A

50A


G6DG/G6DE/G6DC : E/R Junction Block (RLY. 2/3)

ICU Junction Block (Fuse - F33, F34, F40, F43, F44, Leak Current Autocut Relay)

ICU Junction Block (Fuse - F49, IPS5, IPS6, IPS7, IPS8, IPS9)

E/R Junction Block (RLY. 12)

ESC Control Module


G4KJ : E/R Junction Block (RLY. 2/3)

W/O Smart Key : E/R Junction Block (RLY.6), Ignition Switch

With Smart Key : E/R Junction Block (RLY.6), PCB Block, (IG2 Relay)

ICU Junction Block (Fuse - F4, F7, F8, F9, F14, F15, F16, F17, F18, F22)

PCB Block (Fuse - F38, F39, F47, F52, Engine Control Relay)

ICU Junction Block (Fuse - F32, IPS1, IPS2, IPS3, IPS4)

1

POWER

OUTLET

40A E/R Junction Block (RLY. 5)

7-68

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Type Symbol

MULTI FUSE

(TYPE B)

2

IG1

Fuse rating

40A


W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch

With Smart Key : PCB Block, (IG1, ACC Relay)

30A ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

1

E-CVVT

T1

40A G4KJ : E/R Junction Block (RLY. 4)

15A ECM/PCM

FUSE

AM S

FUEL

PUMP

2

E-CVVT

3

E-CVVT

2

10A

10A

20A

20A

20A

10A

10A

10A

Smart Cruise Control Unit

Battery Sensor


G4KJ : PCM

G4KJ : PCM

A/C Control Module

ECM/PCM, ICU Junction Block (IPS Control Module)

A/C Switch, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror

7-69

7

Maintenance

LIIG HT LB

WARNING

Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the Engine Start/Stop button is turned to the OFF position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don’t have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb.

This is especially true if you have to remove the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE

After heavy driving, rain or washing, headlamp and tail lamp lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

❈ Traffic Change (For Europe)

The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand several technical solutions (ex. automatic change system, adhesive sheet, down aiming). These headlamps are designed not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you need not change your headlamps in a country with opposite traffic direction.

7-70

Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp and fog lamp light bulb replacement

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Daytime running lamp/

Position lamp

(4) Turn signal lamp

OIG076035

Headlamp (Halogen bulb)

OLMB073042L

WARNING

• Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

7

7-71

Maintenance

Headlamp (Bulb type)

■ High beam

■ Low beam

OIG076037

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retaining wire by pressing the end and pushing it upward.

6. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly.

7. Install a new headlamp bulb and snap the headlamp bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

8. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

Headlamp (LED type)

If the light bulb does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal lamp (Bulb type)


OIG076038

1. Open the hood.


3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.

i

Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-72

Side repeater lamp replacement

Rear combination light bulb replacement

OIG076036

If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OIG076040

(1) Stop lamp

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Stop/Tail lamp

(4) Back-up lamp

(5) Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

OIG076043

Turn signal lamp

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the service cover by turning the lock counterclockwise and then pulling it out.

Stop/Tail lamp

If the light bulb does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

7

7-73

Maintenance

Turn Signal lamp

Stop/Tail lamp

6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

High mounted stop lamp replacement

OIG076044

3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

Tail lamp, Back up lamp, Rear fog lamp (if equipped)


OIG076041

If the high mounted stop lamp does not operate, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-74

License plate light bulb replacement

Interior light bulb replacement

Map lamp and Room lamp

■ Map lamp ■ Room lamp (Type B)

OIG076042

If the license plate lamp does not operate, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

■ Room lamp (Type A)

OIG076065L OIG076067L

If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7

OIG076066L

7-75

Maintenance

Luggage room lamp, Glove box lamp and Vanity mirror lamp

■ Luggage room lamp ■ Vanity mirror lamp

NOTICE

Use care not to dirty or damage lenses, lens tabs, and plastic housings.

■ Glove box lamp

OIG076045

OIG076046

OLF074069

1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

If the lamps do not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

7-76

A PP AR NC E C AR

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle’s finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits.

A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

7

7-77

Maintenance

WARNING

Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

OLMB073082

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

7-78

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

7-79

7

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

CAUTION

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleanser containing acid or alkaline detergents.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the longterm corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

7-80

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials.

This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.

• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion.

This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

7

7-81

Maintenance

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours.

Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions that follow for the proper way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.

Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

7-82

CAUTION

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Leather (if equipped)

• Feature of Seat Leather

- Leather is made from the outer skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a natural object, each part differs in thickness or density.

Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the products.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

CAUTION

• Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.

• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.

• Make sure not to wet the seat.

It may change the nature of natural leather.

• Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat covering fabric.

7-83

7

Maintenance

• Caring for the leather seats

- Vacuum the seat periodically to remove dust and sand on the seat.

It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its quality.

- Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of proper leather protective may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the color. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.

- Light colored (beige, cream beige) leather is easily contaminated and the stain is noticeable. Clean the seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.

• Cleaning the leather seats

- Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminate spot.

Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.

- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natural leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

7-84

E MIIS SIIO N C NT RO SY ST M

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Service

Passport in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems which are as follows.

CAUTION

For the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the

ESC switch again.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

7

7-85

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes.

Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

7-86

WARNING

Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions following to avoid CO poisoning.

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

Fire

• A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.

Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as dry grass, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot while the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control.

It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

7

7-87

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

CAUTION

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engine.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with extremely low fuel level.

Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

7-88

Specifications & Consumer information

Dimensions ..............................................................8-2

Engine ......................................................................8-2

Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3

Tires and wheels ....................................................8-4

Air conditioning system ........................................8-5

Tire load and speed capacity ...............................8-5

Volume and weight ................................................8-5

Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number ..........................8-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN)....................8-9

Vehicle certification label .....................................8-9

Tire specification and pressure label ...............8-10

Engine number .....................................................8-10

Air conditioner compressor label ......................8-11

Declaration of conformity ..................................8-11

TPMS radio wave certification label

(for Brazil) ............................................................8-11


DIIM EN SIIO S

Items

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

Rear tread

Wheelbase

225/55R17

245/45R18

245/40R19

225/55R17

245/45R18

245/40R19 mm (in)

4,930 (194.1)

1,865 (73.4)

1,470 (57.9)

1,612 (63.5)

1,607 (63.3)

1,602 (63.1)

1,620 (63.8)

1,615 (63.6)

1,610 (63.4)

2,845 (112)

E NG E

Displacement

Item

Bore x Stroke

Firing order

No. of cylinders

Theta 2.4 GDI

2,359 (143.95) cc (cu. in) mm (in.)

88x97 (3.46x3.82)

1-3-4-2

4, in-line

Lambda 3.0 GDI

2,999 (182.98)

Lambda 3.0 MPI

2,999 (182.98)

92x75.2 (3.62x2.96) 92x75.2 (3.62x2.96)

1-2-3-4-5-6

6, V-type

1-2-3-4-5-6

6, V-type

Lambda 3.5 MPI

3,470 (211.7)

92x87 (3.62x3.4)

1-2-3-4-5-6

6, V-type

8-2

B UL B W TT AG

Front

Rear

Interior

Light Bulb

Headlamps

Position lamp

Turn signal lamp (Type A)

Turn signal lamp (Type B)

Daytime running light

Low (Type A)

Low (Type B)

High (Type A)

High (Type B)

Rear combination lamp

Stop lamps

Tail/stop lamp

Turn signal lamp

Back up lamp

Rear fog lamp (if equipped)

High mounted stop lamp

License plate lamps

Luggage lamp

Map lamp

Room lamp

Bulb type

HB3

LED

HB3

LED

LED

PY21W

LED

LED

LED

LED

PY21W

W16W

LED

LED

W5W

LED

LED

LED

Wattage

60W

LED

60W

LED

LED

21W

LED

LED

LED

LED

21W

16W

LED

LED

5W

LED

LED

LED 8

8-3


TIIR ES ND WH EE S

Item

Full size tire

Tire size

Wheel size

Inflation pressure, bar (kPa, psi)

Normal load * 1 Maximum load

Front Rear Front Rear

225/55R17 7.0Jx17

2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33)

245/45R18 7.5Jx18

2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33)

245/40R19 8.0Jx19

2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33) 2.3 (230, 33)

* 1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons

Wheel lug nut torque kgf·m (lbf·ft, N•m)

11~13

(79~94, 107~127)

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 20 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon. Tires typically lose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level

(Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km (+2.4 psi/1 mile).

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

8-4

R C ON

■ Type A

Item

TIIO NIIN SY ST M

Weight of volume Classification

Refrigerant

Compressor lubricant

550±25g

100±10g

R-1234yf

FD46XG

(IDEMITSU)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

■ Type B

Item

Refrigerant

Compressor lubricant

Weight of volume Classification

650±25g

100±10g

R-134a

FD46XG

(IDEMITSU)

TIIR E L AD ND EE D C PA

Item

Full size tire

Tire size

225/55R17

245/45R18

245/40R19

* 1

* 2

LI : LOAD INDEX

SS : SPEED SYMBOL

Wheel size

7.0Jx17

7.5Jx18

8.0Jx19

V OL ME ND GH T

Items

Gross vehicle weight kg (lbs.)

Luggage volume l (cu ft)

Theta 2.4 GDI

A/T

2,060 (4,541)

Load Capacity

LI * 1

97

96

94 kg

730

710

670

Speed Capacity

SS * 2

V

W

W km/h

240

270

270

Lambda 3.0 GDI Lambda 3.0 MPI

A/T A/T

2,130 (4,696)

515 (18.1)

2,130 (4,696)

Lambda 3.5 MPI

A/T

2,120 (4,674)

8-5

8


R EC MM ND LU BR NT S A CA PA TIIE S

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Classification Lubricant

Engine oil * 1 * 2 (drain and refill)

Recommends


Coolant

Theta 2.4 GDI

Lambda 3.0 GDI

Lambda 3.0 MPI

Lambda 3.5 MPI

Theta 2.4 GDI

Lambda 3.0 GDI

Lambda 3.0 MPI

Lambda 3.5 MPI

Theta 2.4 GDI

Lambda 3.0 GDI

Lambda 3.0 MPI

Lambda 3.5 MPI

Volume

4.8 l (5.1 US qt.)

6.5 l (6.8 US qt.)

5.7 l (6 US qt.)

5.7 l (6 US qt.)

6.7 l (7.1 US qt.)

7.0 l (7.4 US qt.)

7.8 l (8.2 US qt.)

7.0 l (7.4 US qt.)

7.2 l (7.65 US qt.)

8.6 l (9.1 US qt.)

8.6 l (9.1 US qt.)

8.6 l (9.1 US qt.)

ACEA A5 * 3 or above

SK ATF SP-IV, MICHANG ATF SP-IV,

NOCA ATF SP-IV, Hyundai Genuine ATF

SP-IV

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

8-6

Brake fluid

Fuel

Lubricant

70 l

Volume

As required

(18.49 US gal.)

Classification

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in the Foreword chapter.

* 1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

* 2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

* 3 : If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API SL, ILSAC GF-3(or above) or ACEA A3.

8-7

8


Recommended SAE viscosity number

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.

This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80

20W-50

100 120

Gasoline engine oil

(Theta 2.4 GDI)

15W-40

10W-30

0/5W-30* 1 , 5W-40

Gasoline engine oil

(Lambda 3.0 GDI,

Lambda 3.0/3.5 MPI)

20W-50

15W-40

10W-30

5W-30* 1 , 5W-40

* 1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade

SAE 5W-30. However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

8-8

V EH E IID EN

■ Frame number

FIIC AT N N MB ER

■ VIN label (if equipped)

V EH E C ER

L AB L

FIIC AT N

OIG086001

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover.

OIG086009L

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

OIG086008

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

8

8-9


TIIR E S EC FIIC AT N A

P RE SU E L BE

E NG NU MB

■ Theta 2.4 GDI ■ Lambda 3.0 GDI

OIG086002

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

■ Lambda 3.0/3.5 MPI

OIG086007 OIG086004

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

OIG086006

8-10

R C ON ON R

C OM RE SO R L BE L

D EC RA TIIO N O F

C ON OR MIIT Y

■ Example

T PM S R AD O W AV

FIIC AT LA BE

((F OR RA

CE RT

OHC081001

A compressor label informs you the type of compressor your vehicle is equipped with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).

CE0678

The radio frequency components of the vehicle comply with requirements and other relevant provisions of

Directive 1995/5/EC.

Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is available on HYUNDAI web site as follows: http://service.hyundai-motor.com

OIG057202L

ANATEL number : 1624-15-2149

8

8-11

Index

I I

Index

A

Accessing your vehicle...................................................3-4

Advanced smart cruise control system.........................5-58

Air bag warning labels .................................................2-70

Air bags.........................................................................2-51

Where are the air bags? .............................................2-53

How does the air bags system operate?.....................2-56

What to expect after an air bag inflates.....................2-60

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ..............2-63

SRS Care....................................................................2-68

Additional safety precautions ....................................2-69

Air bag warning labels...............................................2-70

Air cleaner ....................................................................7-40

Air conditioner compressor label .................................8-11

Air conditioning system - refrigerant .............................8-2

Air conditioning system

Manual climate control system................................3-104

Automatic climate control system ...........................3-114

Alarm system................................................................3-14

Antenna...........................................................................4-2

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .....................................5-42

Appearance care ...........................................................7-89

Exterior care...............................................................7-89

Interior care................................................................7-95

Around View Monitoring (AVM) System....................3-97

Ashtray........................................................................3-133

Audio remote control......................................................4-3

Audio remote control...................................................4-3

Auto hold.............................................................5-39, 7-38

Auto light position........................................................3-90

Automatic climate control system ..............................3-114

Automatic heating and air conditioning ..................3-115

Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-116

Air conditioning ...............................................3-115, 116

Climate control air filter ..........................................3-123

Automatic transmission ................................................5-17

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB).....................5-55

AUX, USB and iPod ® port.............................................4-2

B

Battery...........................................................................7-47

Battery saver function...................................................3-88

Before driving.................................................................5-3

Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ............................5-55

Brake system.................................................................5-38

Power brakes..............................................................5-38

Parking brake (Manual)....................................5-39, 7-38

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) ......................5-39, 7-38

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..................................5-42

Electronic stability control (ESC) .............................5-45

Vehicle stability management ....................................5-49

Hill-start assist control (HAC)...................................5-50

Brakes fluid...................................................................7-34

I-2

Bulb replacement..........................................................7-81

Bulb wattage ...................................................................8-3

Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..............5-10

C

Capacities (Lubricants)...................................................8-6

Care

Tire care .....................................................................7-51

Exterior care...............................................................7-97

Interior care................................................................7-95

Cellular phone holder .................................................3-132

Center console storage................................................3-131

Central door lock switch...............................................3-20

Certification label ...........................................................8-9

Chains

Tire chains..................................................................5-67

Checking tire inflation pressure ...................................7-53

Child restraint system (CRS)........................................2-37

Children always in the rear........................................2-37

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-38

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)................2-40

Child-protector rear door lock ......................................3-22

Cigarette lighter ..........................................................3-133

Climate control air filter .....................................3-112, 124

Climate control air filter replacement ..........................7-42

Clock...........................................................................3-136

Clothes hanger ............................................................3-136

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ..............3-52

Coolant..........................................................................7-31

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant .................................7-31

Crankcase emission control system..............................7-97

Cruise control system ...................................................5-58

Cup holder ..................................................................3-134

D

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination.................................................................3-54

Dashboard, see instrument cluster................................3-52

Day/night rearview mirror ............................................3-43

Daytime running light...................................................3-93

Declaration if conformity .............................................8-12

Defogging (Windshield) .............................................3-126

Defroster (Rear window) ............................................3-103

Defrosting (Windshield) .............................................3-126

Dimensions .....................................................................8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination.................................................................3-54

Displays, see instrument cluster ...................................3-52

Door locks.....................................................................3-18

Central door lock switch............................................3-20

Child-protector rear door lock ...................................3-22

Drinks holders, see cup holders..................................3-134

Drive Mode Integrated Control System .......................5-54

ECO mode .................................................................5-54

Sport mode.................................................................5-54

Smart mode ................................................................5-54

I-3

I

Index

Driver assist system....................................................3-101

Rear view camera ....................................................3-101

Rear parking assist system.......................................3-102

Parking Assist System ...............................................3-95

Around View Monitoring (AVM) System .................3-97

Driver Attention Alert System (DAA) .........................5-55

Driver position memory system ...................................3-22

Easy access function ..................................................3-22

Driving at night.............................................................5-63

Driving in flooded areas ...............................................5-65

Driving in the rain ........................................................5-64

E

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ....................................3-44

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) .........................5-39, 7-38

Electronic stability control (ESC) ................................5-45

Emergency commodity.................................................6-20

Emission control system...............................................7-97

Crankcase emission control system...........................7-97

Evaporative emission control System .......................7-97

Exhaust emission control system...............................7-98

Engine .............................................................................8-2

Engine compartment ...............................................1-6, 7-3

Engine coolant ..............................................................7-31

Engine Coolant Temperature gauge .............................3-57

Engine number..............................................................8-10

Engine oil......................................................................7-28

Engine start/stop button................................................5-10

I-4

Evaporative emission control System ..........................7-97

Exhaust emission control system .................................7-98

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............7-24

Exterior care .................................................................7-89

Exterior features ...........................................................3-35

Hood...........................................................................3-35

Fuel filler door ...........................................................3-35

Emergency fuel filler lid release................................3-35

Exterior overview .......................................................1-2, 3

F

Flat tire (with spare tire)...............................................6-10

Jack and tools.............................................................6-10

Removing and storing the spare tire..........................6-10

Changing tires ............................................................6-11

Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................3-138

Fluid

Brakes fluid................................................................7-34

Washer fluid ...............................................................7-37

Fog light (rear)..............................................................3-93

Front room lamps .........................................................3-99

Front seat ........................................................................2-7

Fuel filler door..............................................................3-35

Fuel Gauge....................................................................3-57

Fuel requirements ...........................................................F-6

Fuses .............................................................................7-63

Instrument panel fuse.................................................7-64

Fuse/relay panel description ......................................7-68

G

Gauges ..........................................................................3-55

Glove box ...................................................................3-131

Glove box lamp ..........................................................3-102

H

Hazard warning flasher...................................................6-3

Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-62

Head up display (HUD)................................................3-82

Headlight (Headlamp) escort function .........................3-88

Headlight bulb replacement..........................................7-82

Headlight leveling device .............................................3-94

Headlight position.........................................................3-89

Headrest ........................................................................2-16

Heater

Manual climate control system................................3-104

Automatic climate control system ...........................3-114

High - beam operation ..................................................3-90

Hill-start assist control (HAC) .....................................5-50

Hood .............................................................................3-35

Horn ..............................................................................3-42

How to use this manual ..................................................F-5

I

If the engine overheats ...................................................6-8

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ................6-3

If the engine stalls while driving ....................................6-3

If the engine will not start ..............................................6-4

If you have a flat tire ....................................................6-10

If you have a flat tire while driving ...............................6-3

Ignition Switch ...............................................................5-6

Key ignition switch......................................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop button..............................................5-6

Immobilizer system ........................................................3-7

Important safety precautions ..........................................2-2

Always wear your seat belt..........................................2-2

Restrain all children.....................................................2-2

Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2

Driver distraction .........................................................2-2

Control your speed.......................................................2-2

Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-2

In case of emergency while driving ...............................6-3

Indicator lights..............................................................3-82

Inside rearview mirror ..................................................3-43

Instrument cluster .........................................................3-52

Instrument panel illumination....................................3-54

LCD Display Control.................................................3-55

Gauges .......................................................................3-55

Transaxle Shift Indicator ...........................................3-59

Instrument panel fuse ...................................................7-64

I-5

I

Index

Instrument panel overview .........................................1-4, 5

Interior care...................................................................7-95

Interior features...........................................................3-133

Cigarette lighter .......................................................3-133

Ashtray.....................................................................3-133

Cup holder ...............................................................3-134

Sunvisor ...................................................................3-135

Power outlet .............................................................3-135

Clock ........................................................................3-136

Clothes hanger .........................................................3-136

Floor mat anchor(s) .................................................3-138

Rear curtain..............................................................3-138

Side curtain ..............................................................3-138

Interior lamp AUTO cut ...............................................3-99

Interior light..................................................................3-99

Interior lamp AUTO cut ............................................3-99

Front lamps ................................................................3-99

Rear lamp.................................................................3-100

Vanity mirror lamp...................................................3-101

Trunk room lamp .....................................................3-101

Glove box lamp .......................................................3-102

Interior overview ........................................................1-2, 3

J

Jack and tools ...............................................................6-10

Jump starting...................................................................6-5

K

Key ignition switch.........................................................5-6

L

Label

Tire sidewall labeling.................................................7-57

Vehicle certification label ............................................8-9

Tire specification and pressure label .........................8-10

Air conditioner compressor label...............................8-11

Refrigerant label.........................................................8-11

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)...................5-55

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ..........................5-55

LCD display..................................................................3-60

LCD modes ................................................................3-60

User Settings Mode ...................................................3-62

Warning Messages .....................................................3-64

LCD Display Control ...................................................3-55

LCD modes...................................................................3-60

Light bulbs....................................................................7-82

Lighting.........................................................................3-88

Battery saver function................................................3-88

Headlight (Headlamp) escort function ......................3-88

Welcome light ............................................................3-88

Parking light position.................................................3-89

Smart high beam ........................................................3-89

Headlight position......................................................3-89

Auto light position .....................................................3-90

I-6

High - beam operation ...............................................3-90

Turn signals................................................................3-91

Rear fog light .............................................................3-93

Daytime running light................................................3-93

Puddle lamp ...............................................................3-94

Headlight leveling device ..........................................3-94

Lubricants and capacities ...............................................8-6

Luggage volume .............................................................8-5

M

Maintenance

Maintenance services...................................................7-5

Owner maintenance .....................................................7-8

Scheduled maintenance service .................................7-10

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items............7-24

Tire maintenance........................................................7-57

Maintenance schedule...................................................7-10

Maintenance services......................................................7-5

Manual climate control system...................................3-104

Heating and air conditioning ...................................3-105

Air conditioning .......................................................3-110

Climate control air filter ..........................................3-112

Mirrors ..........................................................................3-43

Day/night rearview mirror .........................................3-43

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) .................................3-44

Inside rearview mirror ...............................................3-43

Outside rearview mirror.............................................3-48

Reverse parking aid function.....................................3-49

Moonroof, see panorama sunroof.................................3-35

Multimedia system .........................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod ® port ..........................................4-2

Antenna ........................................................................4-2

N

Non-Powered Trunk .....................................................3-35

O

Odometer ......................................................................3-58

Oil (Engine) ..................................................................7-28

Outside rearview mirror ...............................................3-48

Owner maintenance ........................................................7-8

P

Panorama sunroof .........................................................3-35

Parking Assist System ..................................................3-95

Parking brake (Manual) ......................................5-39, 7-38

Parking light position ...................................................3-89

Power brakes.................................................................5-38

Power outlet................................................................3-135

Power steering ..............................................................3-41

Power Trunk .................................................................3-35

Power window lock button...........................................3-29

Puddle lamp ..................................................................3-94

I-7

I

Index

R

Rear curtain.................................................................3-138

Rear parking assist system ...........................................3-95

Rear room lamps.........................................................3-100

Rear seat .......................................................................2-13

Rear view camera .......................................................3-102

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures .................7-51

Recommended lubricants and capacities........................8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number ........................8-8

Reducing the risk of a rollover.....................................5-65

Refrigerant label ...........................................................8-11

Remote key .....................................................................3-7

Replacement light bulb.................................................7-82

Reverse parking aid function........................................3-49

Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-62

Rotation (Tire) ..............................................................7-54

S

Scheduled maintenance service ....................................7-10

Seat belts.......................................................................2-22

Seat belt safety precautions .......................................2-22

Seat belt warning light...............................................2-23

Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-24

Additional seat belt safety precautions......................2-33

Care of seat belts .......................................................2-36

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats .........................2-20

I-8

Seats................................................................................2-4

Safety precautions........................................................2-6

Front seats ....................................................................2-7

Rear seat.....................................................................2-13

Headrest .....................................................................2-16

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats ......................2-20

Side curtain .................................................................3-138

Smart high beam...........................................................3-89

Smart key ......................................................................3-11

Smart Trunk ..................................................................3-35

Smooth cornering .........................................................5-63

Snow tires .....................................................................5-66

Spare tire

Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-11

Changing tires ............................................................6-11

Special driving conditions ............................................5-62

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-62

Reducing the risk of a rollover ..................................5-65

Rocking the vehicle ...................................................5-62

Smooth cornering.......................................................5-63

Driving at night..........................................................5-63

Driving in the rain .....................................................5-64

Driving in flooded areas ............................................5-65

Speedometer .................................................................3-55

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start.................6-4

Steering wheel ..............................................................3-41

Power steering ...........................................................3-41

Tilt steering / Telescope steering ...............................3-41

Horn ...........................................................................3-42

Storage compartment ..................................................3-131

Center console storage.............................................3-131

Glove box.................................................................3-131

Sunglass holder ........................................................3-132

Cellular phone holder ..............................................3-132

Wireless cellular phone charging system ................3-132

Sunglass holder...........................................................3-132

Sunroof, see panorama sunroof ....................................3-35

Sunvisor ......................................................................3-135

T

Tachometer ...................................................................3-56

Theft-alarm system .......................................................3-14

Tilt steering / Telescope steering ..................................3-41

Tire chains ....................................................................5-67

Tire rotation ..................................................................7-54

Tire specification and pressure label ............................8-10

Tires and wheels....................................................7-51, 8-4

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..............7-51

Tire care .....................................................................7-51

Checking tire inflation pressure.................................7-53

Tire rotation ...............................................................7-54

Wheel alignment and tire balance .............................7-55

Tire replacement ........................................................7-55

Wheel replacement ....................................................7-56

Tire maintenance........................................................7-57

Tire traction................................................................7-57

Tire sidewall labeling.................................................7-57

Towing ..........................................................................6-16

Trailer towing ...............................................................5-69

Transaxle Shift Indicator ..............................................3-59

Trip computer ...............................................................3-70

Trip modes .................................................................3-71

Trip modes ....................................................................3-71

Trunk.............................................................................3-29

Non-Powered Trunk...................................................3-35

Power Trunk...............................................................3-35

Smart Trunk ...............................................................3-35

Trunk room lamp ........................................................3-101

Turn signals ..................................................................3-91

U

User Settings Mode ......................................................3-62

V

Vanity mirror lamp .....................................................3-101

Vehicle break-in process...............................................F-10

Vehicle certification label ...............................................8-9

Vehicle handling instructions .......................................F-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)..............................8-9

Vehicle stability management.......................................5-49

Vehicle weight ..............................................................5-78

Volume and weight .........................................................8-5

I-9

I

Index

W

Warning lights...............................................................3-74

Warning Messages - LCD display................................3-64

Washer fluid..................................................................7-37

Welcome light...............................................................3-88

Wheel alignment and tire balance ................................7-55

Wheel replacement .......................................................7-56

Windows .......................................................................3-26

Power window lock button ........................................3-29

Windshield defrosting and defogging ........................3-126

Windshield washers (Front)..........................................3-97

Windshield wipers (Front)............................................3-95

Winter driving...............................................................5-66

Snow tires ..................................................................5-66

Tire chains..................................................................5-67

Wiper blades .................................................................7-44

Wipers and washers ......................................................3-95

Windshield wipers (Front) .........................................3-95

Windshield washers (Front).......................................3-97

Wireless cellular phone charging system ...................3-132

I-10